ATTINY13_14 [ATMEL]

High Endurance Non-volatile Memory segments;
ATTINY13_14
型号: ATTINY13_14
厂家: ATMEL    ATMEL
描述:

High Endurance Non-volatile Memory segments

文件: 总176页 (文件大小:3102K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
Features  
High Performance, Low Power AVR® 8-Bit Microcontroller  
Advanced RISC Architecture  
– 120 Powerful Instructions – Most Single Clock Cycle Execution  
– 32 x 8 General Purpose Working Registers  
– Fully Static Operation  
– Up to 20 MIPS Througput at 20 MHz  
High Endurance Non-volatile Memory segments  
– 1K Bytes of In-System Self-programmable Flash program memory  
– 64 Bytes EEPROM  
8-bit  
– 64 Bytes Internal SRAM  
Microcontroller  
with 1K Bytes  
In-System  
Programmable  
Flash  
– Write/Erase cyles: 10,000 Flash/100,000 EEPROM  
– Data retention: 20 years at 85°C/100 years at 25°C (see page 6)  
– Programming Lock for Self-Programming Flash & EEPROM Data Security  
Peripheral Features  
– One 8-bit Timer/Counter with Prescaler and Two PWM Channels  
– 4-channel, 10-bit ADC with Internal Voltage Reference  
– Programmable Watchdog Timer with Separate On-chip Oscillator  
– On-chip Analog Comparator  
Special Microcontroller Features  
– debugWIRE On-chip Debug System  
– In-System Programmable via SPI Port  
– External and Internal Interrupt Sources  
– Low Power Idle, ADC Noise Reduction, and Power-down Modes  
– Enhanced Power-on Reset Circuit  
– Programmable Brown-out Detection Circuit  
– Internal Calibrated Oscillator  
ATtiny13  
ATtiny13V  
I/O and Packages  
– 8-pin PDIP/SOIC: Six Programmable I/O Lines  
– 20-pad MLF: Six Programmable I/O Lines  
Operating Voltage:  
– 1.8 - 5.5V for ATtiny13V  
– 2.7 - 5.5V for ATtiny13  
Speed Grade  
– ATtiny13V: 0 - 4 MHz @ 1.8 - 5.5V, 0 - 10 MHz @ 2.7 - 5.5V  
– ATtiny13: 0 - 10 MHz @ 2.7 - 5.5V, 0 - 20 MHz @ 4.5 - 5.5V  
Industrial Temperature Range  
Low Power Consumption  
– Active Mode:  
• 1 MHz, 1.8V: 240 µA  
– Power-down Mode:  
• < 0.1 µA at 1.8V  
Rev. 2535J–AVR–08/10  
1. Pin Configurations  
Figure 1-1. Pinout ATtiny13/ATtiny13V  
8-PDIP/SOIC  
(PCINT5/RESET/ADC0/dW) PB5  
(PCINT3/CLKI/ADC3) PB3  
(PCINT4/ADC2) PB4  
GND  
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
VCC  
PB2 (SCK/ADC1/T0/PCINT2)  
PB1 (MISO/AIN1/OC0B/INT0/PCINT1)  
PB0 (MOSI/AIN0/OC0A/PCINT0)  
20-QFN/MLF  
(PCINT5/RESET/ADC0/dW) PB5  
(PCINT3/CLKI/ADC3) PB3  
DNC  
1
15  
VCC  
2
3
4
5
14  
13  
12  
11  
PB2 (SCK/ADC1/T0/PCINT2)  
DNC  
DNC  
PB1 (MISO/AIN1/OC0B/INT0/PCINT1)  
PB0 (MOSI/AIN0/OC0A/PCINT0)  
(PCINT4/ADC2) PB4  
NOTE: Bottom pad should be soldered to ground.  
DNC: Do Not Connect  
10-QFN/MLF  
(PCINT5/RESET/ADC0/dW) PB5  
(PCINT3/CLKI/ADC3) PB3  
DNC  
1
2
3
4
5
10  
9
VCC  
PB2 (SCK/ADC1/T0/PCINT2)  
DNC  
8
(PCINT4/ADC2) PB4  
GND  
7
PB1 (MISO/AIN1/OC0B/INT0/PCINT1)  
PB0 (MOSI/AIN0/OC0A/PCINT0)  
6
NOTE: Bottom pad should be soldered to ground.  
DNC: Do Not Connect  
2
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
1.1  
Pin Descriptions  
1.1.1  
VCC  
Digital supply voltage.  
1.1.2  
1.1.3  
GND  
Ground.  
Port B (PB5:PB0)  
Port B is a 6-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The  
Port B output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source  
capability. As inputs, Port B pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up  
resistors are activated. The Port B pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,  
even if the clock is not running.  
Port B also serves the functions of various special features of the ATtiny13 as listed on page 54.  
1.1.4  
RESET  
Reset input. A low level on this pin for longer than the minimum pulse length will generate a  
reset, even if the clock is not running. The minimum pulse length is given in Table 18-1 on page  
115. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a reset.  
The reset pin can also be used as a (weak) I/O pin.  
3
2535J–AVR–08/10  
2. Overview  
The ATtiny13 is a low-power CMOS 8-bit microcontroller based on the AVR enhanced RISC  
architecture. By executing powerful instructions in a single clock cycle, the ATtiny13 achieves  
throughputs approaching 1 MIPS per MHz allowing the system designer to optimize power con-  
sumption versus processing speed.  
2.1  
Block Diagram  
Figure 2-1. Block Diagram  
8-BIT DATABUS  
STACK  
POINTER  
CALIBRATED  
INTERNAL  
OSCILLATOR  
WATCHDOG  
OSCILLATOR  
SRAM  
WATCHDOG  
TIMER  
TIMING AND  
CONTROL  
VCC  
GND  
MCU CONTROL  
REGISTER  
PROGRAM  
COUNTER  
MCU STATUS  
REGISTER  
PROGRAM  
FLASH  
TIMER/  
COUNTER0  
INSTRUCTION  
REGISTER  
GENERAL  
PURPOSE  
REGISTERS  
INTERRUPT  
UNIT  
X
Y
Z
PROGRAMMING  
LOGIC  
INSTRUCTION  
DECODER  
DATA  
EEPROM  
CONTROL  
LINES  
ALU  
STATUS  
REGISTER  
ADC /  
ANALOG COMPARATOR  
DATA REGISTER  
PORT B  
DATA DIR.  
REG.PORT B  
PORT B DRIVERS  
RESET  
CLKI  
PB0-PB5  
4
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
The AVR core combines a rich instruction set with 32 general purpose working registers. All 32  
registers are directly connected to the Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU), allowing two independent  
registers to be accessed in one single instruction executed in one clock cycle. The resulting  
architecture is more code efficient while achieving throughputs up to ten times faster than con-  
ventional CISC microcontrollers.  
The ATtiny13 provides the following features: 1K byte of In-System Programmable Flash, 64  
bytes EEPROM, 64 bytes SRAM, 6 general purpose I/O lines, 32 general purpose working reg-  
isters, one 8-bit Timer/Counter with compare modes, Internal and External Interrupts, a 4-  
channel, 10-bit ADC, a programmable Watchdog Timer with internal Oscillator, and three soft-  
ware selectable power saving modes. The Idle mode stops the CPU while allowing the SRAM,  
Timer/Counter, ADC, Analog Comparator, and Interrupt system to continue functioning. The  
Power-down mode saves the register contents, disabling all chip functions until the next Inter-  
rupt or Hardware Reset. The ADC Noise Reduction mode stops the CPU and all I/O modules  
except ADC, to minimize switching noise during ADC conversions.  
The device is manufactured using Atmel’s high density non-volatile memory technology. The  
On-chip ISP Flash allows the Program memory to be re-programmed In-System through an SPI  
serial interface, by a conventional non-volatile memory programmer or by an On-chip boot code  
running on the AVR core.  
The ATtiny13 AVR is supported with a full suite of program and system development tools  
including: C Compilers, Macro Assemblers, Program Debugger/Simulators, and Evaluation kits.  
5
2535J–AVR–08/10  
3. General Information  
3.1  
Resources  
A comprehensive set of drivers, application notes, data sheets and descriptions on development  
tools are available for download at http://www.atmel.com/avr.  
3.2  
Code Examples  
This documentation contains simple code examples that briefly show how to use various parts of  
the device. These code examples assume that the part specific header file is included before  
compilation. Be aware that not all C compiler vendors include bit definitions in the header files  
and interrupt handling in C is compiler dependent. Please confirm with the C compiler documen-  
tation for more details.  
3.3  
Data Retention  
Reliability Qualification results show that the projected data retention failure rate is much less  
than 1 PPM over 20 years at 85°C or 100 years at 25°C.  
6
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
4. CPU Core  
This section discusses the AVR core architecture in general. The main function of the CPU core  
is to ensure correct program execution. The CPU must therefore be able to access memories,  
perform calculations, control peripherals, and handle interrupts.  
4.1  
Architectural Overview  
Figure 4-1. Block Diagram of the AVR Architecture  
Data Bus 8-bit  
Program  
Counter  
Status  
and Control  
Flash  
Program  
Memory  
32 x 8  
General  
Purpose  
Registrers  
Instruction  
Register  
Interrupt  
Unit  
Instruction  
Decoder  
Watchdog  
Timer  
ALU  
Analog  
Comparator  
Control Lines  
I/O Module1  
I/O Module 2  
I/O Module n  
Data  
SRAM  
EEPROM  
I/O Lines  
In order to maximize performance and parallelism, the AVR uses a Harvard architecture – with  
separate memories and buses for program and data. Instructions in the Program memory are  
executed with a single level pipelining. While one instruction is being executed, the next instruc-  
tion is pre-fetched from the Program memory. This concept enables instructions to be executed  
in every clock cycle. The Program memory is In-System Reprogrammable Flash memory.  
7
2535J–AVR–08/10  
The fast-access Register File contains 32 x 8-bit general purpose working registers with a single  
clock cycle access time. This allows single-cycle Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) operation. In a typ-  
ical ALU operation, two operands are output from the Register File, the operation is executed,  
and the result is stored back in the Register File – in one clock cycle.  
Six of the 32 registers can be used as three 16-bit indirect address register pointers for Data  
Space addressing – enabling efficient address calculations. One of the these address pointers  
can also be used as an address pointer for look up tables in Flash Program memory. These  
added function registers are the 16-bit X-, Y-, and Z-register, described later in this section.  
The ALU supports arithmetic and logic operations between registers or between a constant and  
a register. Single register operations can also be executed in the ALU. After an arithmetic opera-  
tion, the Status Register is updated to reflect information about the result of the operation.  
Program flow is provided by conditional and unconditional jump and call instructions, able to  
directly address the whole address space. Most AVR instructions have a single 16-bit word for-  
mat. Every Program memory address contains a 16- or 32-bit instruction.  
During interrupts and subroutine calls, the return address Program Counter (PC) is stored on the  
Stack. The Stack is effectively allocated in the general data SRAM, and consequently the Stack  
size is only limited by the total SRAM size and the usage of the SRAM. All user programs must  
initialize the SP in the Reset routine (before subroutines or interrupts are executed). The Stack  
Pointer (SP) is read/write accessible in the I/O space. The data SRAM can easily be accessed  
through the five different addressing modes supported in the AVR architecture.  
The memory spaces in the AVR architecture are all linear and regular memory maps.  
A flexible interrupt module has its control registers in the I/O space with an additional Global  
Interrupt Enable bit in the Status Register. All interrupts have a separate Interrupt Vector in the  
Interrupt Vector table. The interrupts have priority in accordance with their Interrupt Vector posi-  
tion. The lower the Interrupt Vector address, the higher the priority.  
The I/O memory space contains 64 addresses for CPU peripheral functions as Control Regis-  
ters, SPI, and other I/O functions. The I/O memory can be accessed directly, or as the Data  
Space locations following those of the Register File, 0x20 - 0x5F.  
4.2  
4.3  
ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit  
The high-performance AVR ALU operates in direct connection with all the 32 general purpose  
working registers. Within a single clock cycle, arithmetic operations between general purpose  
registers or between a register and an immediate are executed. The ALU operations are divided  
into three main categories – arithmetic, logical, and bit-functions. Some implementations of the  
architecture also provide a powerful multiplier supporting both signed/unsigned multiplication  
and fractional format. See the “Instruction Set” section for a detailed description.  
Status Register  
The Status Register contains information about the result of the most recently executed arithme-  
tic instruction. This information can be used for altering program flow in order to perform  
conditional operations. Note that the Status Register is updated after all ALU operations, as  
specified in the Instruction Set Reference. This will in many cases remove the need for using the  
dedicated compare instructions, resulting in faster and more compact code.  
The Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine and restored  
when returning from an interrupt. This must be handled by software.  
8
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
4.3.1  
SREG – Status Register  
Bit  
7
I
6
T
5
H
4
S
3
V
2
N
1
Z
0
C
R/W  
0
SREG  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
• Bit 7 – I: Global Interrupt Enable  
The Global Interrupt Enable bit must be set for the interrupts to be enabled. The individual inter-  
rupt enable control is then performed in separate control registers. If the Global Interrupt Enable  
Register is cleared, none of the interrupts are enabled independent of the individual interrupt  
enable settings. The I-bit is cleared by hardware after an interrupt has occurred, and is set by  
the RETI instruction to enable subsequent interrupts. The I-bit can also be set and cleared by  
the application with the SEI and CLI instructions, as described in the instruction set reference.  
• Bit 6 – T: Bit Copy Storage  
The Bit Copy instructions BLD (Bit LoaD) and BST (Bit STore) use the T-bit as source or desti-  
nation for the operated bit. A bit from a register in the Register File can be copied into T by the  
BST instruction, and a bit in T can be copied into a bit in a register in the Register File by the  
BLD instruction.  
• Bit 5 – H: Half Carry Flag  
The Half Carry Flag H indicates a Half Carry in some arithmetic operations. Half Carry is useful  
in BCD arithmetic. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.  
• Bit 4 – S: Sign Bit, S = N V  
The S-bit is always an exclusive or between the Negative Flag N and the Two’s Complement  
Overflow Flag V. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.  
• Bit 3 – V: Two’s Complement Overflow Flag  
The Two’s Complement Overflow Flag V supports two’s complement arithmetics. See the  
“Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.  
• Bit 2 – N: Negative Flag  
The Negative Flag N indicates a negative result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the  
“Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.  
• Bit 1 – Z: Zero Flag  
The Zero Flag Z indicates a zero result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction  
Set Description” for detailed information.  
• Bit 0 – C: Carry Flag  
The Carry Flag C indicates a carry in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction Set  
Description” for detailed information.  
9
2535J–AVR–08/10  
4.4  
General Purpose Register File  
The Register File is optimized for the AVR Enhanced RISC instruction set. In order to achieve  
the required performance and flexibility, the following input/output schemes are supported by the  
Register File:  
• One 8-bit output operand and one 8-bit result input  
• Two 8-bit output operands and one 8-bit result input  
• Two 8-bit output operands and one 16-bit result input  
• One 16-bit output operand and one 16-bit result input  
Figure 4-2 shows the structure of the 32 general purpose working registers in the CPU.  
Figure 4-2. AVR CPU General Purpose Working Registers  
7
0
Addr.  
R0  
R1  
0x00  
0x01  
0x02  
R2  
R13  
R14  
R15  
R16  
R17  
0x0D  
0x0E  
0x0F  
0x10  
0x11  
General  
Purpose  
Working  
Registers  
R26  
R27  
R28  
R29  
R30  
R31  
0x1A  
0x1B  
0x1C  
0x1D  
0x1E  
0x1F  
X-register Low Byte  
X-register High Byte  
Y-register Low Byte  
Y-register High Byte  
Z-register Low Byte  
Z-register High Byte  
Most of the instructions operating on the Register File have direct access to all registers, and  
most of them are single cycle instructions.  
As shown in Figure 4-2 on page 10, each register is also assigned a Data memory address,  
mapping them directly into the first 32 locations of the user Data Space. Although not being  
physically implemented as SRAM locations, this memory organization provides great flexibility in  
access of the registers, as the X-, Y- and Z-pointer registers can be set to index any register in  
the file.  
4.4.1  
The X-register, Y-register, and Z-register  
The registers R26..R31 have some added functions to their general purpose usage. These reg-  
isters are 16-bit address pointers for indirect addressing of the data space. The three indirect  
address registers X, Y, and Z are defined as described in Figure 4-3 on page 11.  
10  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 4-3. The X-, Y-, and Z-registers  
15  
XH  
XL  
0
0
X-register  
7
0
7
R27 (0x1B)  
R26 (0x1A)  
15  
YH  
YL  
ZL  
0
0
Y-register  
Z-register  
7
0
7
R29 (0x1D)  
R28 (0x1C)  
15  
ZH  
0
0
7
7
0
R31 (0x1F)  
R30 (0x1E)  
In the different addressing modes these address registers have functions as fixed displacement,  
automatic increment, and automatic decrement (see the instruction set reference for details).  
4.5  
Stack Pointer  
The Stack is mainly used for storing temporary data, for storing local variables and for storing  
return addresses after interrupts and subroutine calls. The Stack Pointer Register always points  
to the top of the Stack. Note that the Stack is implemented as growing from higher memory loca-  
tions to lower memory locations. This implies that a Stack PUSH command decreases the Stack  
Pointer.  
The Stack Pointer points to the data SRAM Stack area where the Subroutine and Interrupt  
Stacks are located. This Stack space in the data SRAM is automaticall defined to the last  
address in SRAM during power on reset. The Stack Pointer must be set to point above 0x60.  
The Stack Pointer is decremented by one when data is pushed onto the Stack with the PUSH  
instruction, and it is decremented by two when the return address is pushed onto the Stack with  
subroutine call or interrupt. The Stack Pointer is incremented by one when data is popped from  
the Stack with the POP instruction, and it is incremented by two when data is popped from the  
Stack with return from subroutine RET or return from interrupt RETI.  
The AVR Stack Pointer is implemented as two 8-bit registers in the I/O space. The number of  
bits actually used is implementation dependent. Note that the data space in some implementa-  
tions of the AVR architecture is so small that only SPL is needed. In this case, the SPH Register  
will not be present.  
4.5.1  
SPL - Stack Pointer Low.  
Bit  
15  
SP7  
7
14  
SP6  
6
13  
SP5  
5
12  
SP4  
4
11  
SP3  
3
10  
SP2  
2
9
SP1  
1
8
SP0  
0
SPL  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
1
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
1
R/W  
1
R/W  
1
R/W  
1
R/W  
1
11  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
4.6  
Instruction Execution Timing  
This section describes the general access timing concepts for instruction execution. The AVR  
CPU is driven by the CPU clock clkCPU, directly generated from the selected clock source for the  
chip. No internal clock division is used.  
Figure 4-4 on page 12 shows the parallel instruction fetches and instruction executions enabled  
by the Harvard architecture and the fast access Register File concept. This is the basic pipelin-  
ing concept to obtain up to 1 MIPS per MHz with the corresponding unique results for functions  
per cost, functions per clocks, and functions per power-unit.  
Figure 4-4. The Parallel Instruction Fetches and Instruction Executions  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
clkCPU  
1st Instruction Fetch  
1st Instruction Execute  
2nd Instruction Fetch  
2nd Instruction Execute  
3rd Instruction Fetch  
3rd Instruction Execute  
4th Instruction Fetch  
Figure 4-5 on page 12 shows the internal timing concept for the Register File. In a single clock  
cycle an ALU operation using two register operands is executed, and the result is stored back to  
the destination register.  
Figure 4-5. Single Cycle ALU Operation  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
clkCPU  
Total Execution Time  
Register Operands Fetch  
ALU Operation Execute  
Result Write Back  
4.7  
Reset and Interrupt Handling  
The AVR provides several different interrupt sources. These interrupts and the separate Reset  
Vector each have a separate Program Vector in the Program memory space. All interrupts are  
assigned individual enable bits which must be written logic one together with the Global Interrupt  
Enable bit in the Status Register in order to enable the interrupt.  
The lowest addresses in the Program memory space are by default defined as the Reset and  
Interrupt Vectors. The complete list of vectors is shown in “Interrupts” on page 44. The list also  
determines the priority levels of the different interrupts. The lower the address the higher is the  
12  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
priority level. RESET has the highest priority, and next is INT0 – the External Interrupt Request  
0.  
When an interrupt occurs, the Global Interrupt Enable I-bit is cleared and all interrupts are dis-  
abled. The user software can write logic one to the I-bit to enable nested interrupts. All enabled  
interrupts can then interrupt the current interrupt routine. The I-bit is automatically set when a  
Return from Interrupt instruction – RETI – is executed.  
There are basically two types of interrupts. The first type is triggered by an event that sets the  
Interrupt Flag. For these interrupts, the Program Counter is vectored to the actual Interrupt Vec-  
tor in order to execute the interrupt handling routine, and hardware clears the corresponding  
Interrupt Flag. Interrupt Flags can also be cleared by writing a logic one to the flag bit position(s)  
to be cleared. If an interrupt condition occurs while the corresponding interrupt enable bit is  
cleared, the Interrupt Flag will be set and remembered until the interrupt is enabled, or the flag is  
cleared by software. Similarly, if one or more interrupt conditions occur while the Global Interrupt  
Enable bit is cleared, the corresponding Interrupt Flag(s) will be set and remembered until the  
Global Interrupt Enable bit is set, and will then be executed by order of priority.  
The second type of interrupts will trigger as long as the interrupt condition is present. These  
interrupts do not necessarily have Interrupt Flags. If the interrupt condition disappears before the  
interrupt is enabled, the interrupt will not be triggered.  
When the AVR exits from an interrupt, it will always return to the main program and execute one  
more instruction before any pending interrupt is served.  
Note that the Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine, nor  
restored when returning from an interrupt routine. This must be handled by software.  
When using the CLI instruction to disable interrupts, the interrupts will be immediately disabled.  
No interrupt will be executed after the CLI instruction, even if it occurs simultaneously with the  
CLI instruction. The following example shows how this can be used to avoid interrupts during the  
timed EEPROM write sequence..  
Assembly Code Example  
in r16, SREG  
; store SREG value  
cli ; disable interrupts during timed sequence  
sbiEECR, EEMPE ; start EEPROM write  
sbiEECR, EEPE  
outSREG, r16  
; restore SREG value (I-bit)  
C Code Example  
char cSREG;  
cSREG = SREG;/* store SREG value */  
/* disable interrupts during timed sequence */  
__disable_interrupt();  
EECR |= (1<<EEMPE); /* start EEPROM write */  
EECR |= (1<<EEPE);  
SREG = cSREG; /* restore SREG value (I-bit) */  
13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
When using the SEI instruction to enable interrupts, the instruction following SEI will be exe-  
cuted before any pending interrupts, as shown in this example.  
Assembly Code Example  
sei ; set Global Interrupt Enable  
sleep; enter sleep, waiting for interrupt  
; note: will enter sleep before any pending  
; interrupt(s)  
C Code Example  
__enable_interrupt(); /* set Global Interrupt Enable */  
__sleep(); /* enter sleep, waiting for interrupt */  
/* note: will enter sleep before any pending interrupt(s) */  
4.7.1  
Interrupt Response Time  
The interrupt execution response for all the enabled AVR interrupts is four clock cycles mini-  
mum. After four clock cycles the Program Vector address for the actual interrupt handling routine  
is executed. During this four clock cycle period, the Program Counter is pushed onto the Stack.  
The vector is normally a jump to the interrupt routine, and this jump takes three clock cycles. If  
an interrupt occurs during execution of a multi-cycle instruction, this instruction is completed  
before the interrupt is served. If an interrupt occurs when the MCU is in sleep mode, the interrupt  
execution response time is increased by four clock cycles. This increase comes in addition to the  
start-up time from the selected sleep mode.  
A return from an interrupt handling routine takes four clock cycles. During these four clock  
cycles, the Program Counter (two bytes) is popped back from the Stack, the Stack Pointer is  
incremented by two, and the I-bit in SREG is set.  
14  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
5. Memories  
This section describes the different memories in the ATtiny13. The AVR architecture has two  
main memory spaces, the Data memory and the Program memory space. In addition, the  
ATtiny13 features an EEPROM Memory for data storage. All three memory spaces are linear  
and regular.  
5.1  
In-System Reprogrammable Flash Program Memory  
The ATtiny13 contains 1K byte On-chip In-System Reprogrammable Flash memory for program  
storage. Since all AVR instructions are 16 or 32 bits wide, the Flash is organized as 512 x 16.  
The Flash memory has an endurance of at least 10,000 write/erase cycles. The ATtiny13 Pro-  
gram Counter (PC) is nine bits wide, thus addressing the 512 Program memory locations.  
“Memory Programming” on page 102 contains a detailed description on Flash data serial down-  
loading using the SPI pins.  
Constant tables can be allocated within the entire Program memory address space (see the  
LPM – Load Program memory instruction description).  
Timing diagrams for instruction fetch and execution are presented in “Instruction Execution Tim-  
ing” on page 12.  
Figure 5-1. Program Memory Map  
Program Memory  
0x0000  
0x01FF  
5.2  
SRAM Data Memory  
Figure 5-2 on page 16 shows how the ATtiny13 SRAM Memory is organized.  
The lower 160 Data memory locations address both the Register File, the I/O memory and the  
internal data SRAM. The first 32 locations address the Register File, the next 64 locations the  
standard I/O memory, and the last 64 locations address the internal data SRAM.  
The five different addressing modes for the Data memory cover: Direct, Indirect with Displace-  
ment, Indirect, Indirect with Pre-decrement, and Indirect with Post-increment. In the Register  
File, registers R26 to R31 feature the indirect addressing pointer registers.  
The direct addressing reaches the entire data space.  
The Indirect with Displacement mode reaches 63 address locations from the base address given  
by the Y- or Z-register.  
When using register indirect addressing modes with automatic pre-decrement and post-incre-  
ment, the address registers X, Y, and Z are decremented or incremented.  
15  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
The 32 general purpose working registers, 64 I/O Registers, and the 64 bytes of internal data  
SRAM in the ATtiny13 are all accessible through all these addressing modes. The Register File  
is described in “General Purpose Register File” on page 10.  
Figure 5-2. Data Memory Map  
Data Memory  
0x0000 - 0x001F  
0x0020 - 0x005F  
0x0060  
32 Registers  
64 I/O Registers  
Internal SRAM  
(64 x 8)  
0x009F  
5.2.1  
Data Memory Access Times  
This section describes the general access timing concepts for internal memory access. The  
internal data SRAM access is performed in two clkCPU cycles as described in Figure 5-3.  
Figure 5-3. On-chip Data SRAM Access Cycles  
T1  
T2  
T3  
clkCPU  
Address valid  
Compute Address  
Address  
Data  
WR  
Data  
RD  
Memory Access Instruction  
Next Instruction  
5.3  
EEPROM Data Memory  
The ATtiny13 contains 64 bytes of data EEPROM memory. It is organized as a separate data  
space, in which single bytes can be read and written. The EEPROM has an endurance of at  
least 100,000 write/erase cycles. The access between the EEPROM and the CPU is described  
in the following, specifying the EEPROM Address Registers, the EEPROM Data Register, and  
the EEPROM Control Register. For a detailed description of Serial data downloading to the  
EEPROM, see page 105.  
5.3.1  
16  
EEPROM Read/Write Access  
The EEPROM Access Registers are accessible in the I/O space.  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
The write access times for the EEPROM are given in Table 5-1 on page 21. A self-timing func-  
tion, however, lets the user software detect when the next byte can be written. If the user code  
contains instructions that write the EEPROM, some precautions must be taken. In heavily fil-  
tered power supplies, VCC is likely to rise or fall slowly on Power-up/down. This causes the  
device for some period of time to run at a voltage lower than specified as minimum for the clock  
frequency used. See “Preventing EEPROM Corruption” on page 19 for details on how to avoid  
problems in these situations.  
In order to prevent unintentional EEPROM writes, a specific write procedure must be followed.  
Refer to “Atomic Byte Programming” on page 17 and “Split Byte Programming” on page 17 for  
details on this.  
When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is halted for four clock cycles before the next instruction is  
executed. When the EEPROM is written, the CPU is halted for two clock cycles before the next  
instruction is executed.  
5.3.2  
Atomic Byte Programming  
Using Atomic Byte Programming is the simplest mode. When writing a byte to the EEPROM, the  
user must write the address into the EEARL Register and data into EEDR Register. If the  
EEPMn bits are zero, writing EEPE (within four cycles after EEMPE is written) will trigger the  
erase/write operation. Both the erase and write cycle are done in one operation and the total  
programming time is given in Table 5-1 on page 21. The EEPE bit remains set until the erase  
and write operations are completed. While the device is busy with programming, it is not possi-  
ble to do any other EEPROM operations.  
5.3.3  
Split Byte Programming  
It is possible to split the erase and write cycle in two different operations. This may be useful if  
the system requires short access time for some limited period of time (typically if the power sup-  
ply voltage falls). In order to take advantage of this method, it is required that the locations to be  
written have been erased before the write operation. But since the erase and write operations  
are split, it is possible to do the erase operations when the system allows doing time-critical  
operations (typically after Power-up).  
5.3.4  
5.3.5  
Erase  
Write  
To erase a byte, the address must be written to EEARL. If the EEPMn bits are 0b01, writing the  
EEPE (within four cycles after EEMPE is written) will trigger the erase operation only (program-  
ming time is given in Table 5-1 on page 21). The EEPE bit remains set until the erase operation  
completes. While the device is busy programming, it is not possible to do any other EEPROM  
operations.  
To write a location, the user must write the address into EEARL and the data into EEDR. If the  
EEPMn bits are 0b10, writing the EEPE (within four cycles after EEMPE is written) will trigger  
the write operation only (programming time is given in Table 5-1 on page 21). The EEPE bit  
remains set until the write operation completes. If the location to be written has not been erased  
before write, the data that is stored must be considered as lost. While the device is busy with  
programming, it is not possible to do any other EEPROM operations.  
The calibrated Oscillator is used to time the EEPROM accesses. Make sure the Oscillator fre-  
quency is within the requirements described in “OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Register” on  
page 27.  
17  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
The following code examples show one assembly and one C function for erase, write, or atomic  
write of the EEPROM. The examples assume that interrupts are controlled (e.g., by disabling  
interrupts globally) so that no interrupts will occur during execution of these functions.  
Assembly Code Example  
EEPROM_write:  
; Wait for completion of previous write  
sbic EECR,EEPE  
rjmp EEPROM_write  
; Set Programming mode  
ldi r16, (0<<EEPM1)|(0<<EEPM0)  
out EECR, r16  
; Set up address (r17) in address register  
out EEARL, r17  
; Write data (r16) to data register  
out EEDR,r16  
; Write logical one to EEMPE  
sbi EECR,EEMPE  
; Start eeprom write by setting EEPE  
sbi EECR,EEPE  
ret  
C Code Example  
void EEPROM_write(unsigned char ucAddress, unsigned char ucData)  
{
/* Wait for completion of previous write */  
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE))  
;
/* Set Programming mode */  
EECR = (0<<EEPM1)|(0>>EEPM0)  
/* Set up address and data registers */  
EEARL = ucAddress;  
EEDR = ucData;  
/* Write logical one to EEMPE */  
EECR |= (1<<EEMPE);  
/* Start eeprom write by setting EEPE */  
EECR |= (1<<EEPE);  
}
18  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
The next code examples show assembly and C functions for reading the EEPROM. The exam-  
ples assume that interrupts are controlled so that no interrupts will occur during execution of  
these functions.  
Assembly Code Example  
EEPROM_read:  
; Wait for completion of previous write  
sbic EECR,EEPE  
rjmp EEPROM_read  
; Set up address (r17) in address register  
out EEARL, r17  
; Start eeprom read by writing EERE  
sbi EECR,EERE  
; Read data from data register  
in r16,EEDR  
ret  
C Code Example  
unsigned char EEPROM_read(unsigned char ucAddress)  
{
/* Wait for completion of previous write */  
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE))  
;
/* Set up address register */  
EEARL = ucAddress;  
/* Start eeprom read by writing EERE */  
EECR |= (1<<EERE);  
/* Return data from data register */  
return EEDR;  
}
5.3.6  
Preventing EEPROM Corruption  
During periods of low VCC, the EEPROM data can be corrupted because the supply voltage is  
too low for the CPU and the EEPROM to operate properly. These issues are the same as for  
board level systems using EEPROM, and the same design solutions should be applied.  
An EEPROM data corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too low. First,  
a regular write sequence to the EEPROM requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly. Sec-  
ondly, the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the supply voltage is too low.  
EEPROM data corruption can easily be avoided by following this design recommendation:  
Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage. This can  
be done by enabling the internal Brown-out Detector (BOD). If the detection level of the internal  
BOD does not match the needed detection level, an external low VCC reset protection circuit can  
be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progress, the write operation will be com-  
pleted provided that the power supply voltage is sufficient.  
19  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
5.4  
I/O Memory  
The I/O space definition of the ATtiny13 is shown in “Register Summary” on page 156.  
All ATtiny13 I/Os and peripherals are placed in the I/O space. All I/O locations may be accessed  
by the LD/LDS/LDD and ST/STS/STD instructions, transferring data between the 32 general  
purpose working registers and the I/O space. I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 -  
0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these registers, the value  
of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions. Refer to the instruction  
set section for more details. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O  
addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used. When addressing I/O Registers as data space using LD  
and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses.  
For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed.  
Reserved I/O memory addresses should never be written.  
Some of the Status Flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most  
other AVRs, the CBI and SBI instructions will only operate on the specified bit, and can therefore  
be used on registers containing such Status Flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work with reg-  
isters 0x00 to 0x1F only.  
The I/O and Peripherals Control Registers are explained in later sections.  
5.5  
Register Description  
5.5.1  
EEARL – EEPROM Address Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
EEAR5  
R/W  
X
4
EEAR4  
R/W  
X
3
EEAR3  
R/W  
X
2
EEAR2  
R/W  
X
1
EEAR1  
R/W  
X
0
EEAR0  
R/W  
X
EEARL  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:6 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13 and will always read as zero.  
• Bits 5:0 – EEAR[5:0]: EEPROM Address  
The EEPROM Address Register – EEARL – specifies the EEPROM address in the 64 bytes  
EEPROM space. The EEPROM data bytes are addressed linearly between 0 and 63. The initial  
value of EEARL is undefined. A proper value must be written before the EEPROM may be  
accessed.  
5.5.2  
EEDR – EEPROM Data Register  
Bit  
7
6
EEDR6  
R/W  
X
5
EEDR5  
R/W  
X
4
EEDR4  
R/W  
X
3
EEDR3  
R/W  
X
2
EEDR2  
R/W  
X
1
EEDR1  
R/W  
X
0
EEDR0  
R/W  
X
EEDR7  
R/W  
X
EEDR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
• Bits 7:0 – EEDR7:0: EEPROM Data  
For the EEPROM write operation the EEDR Register contains the data to be written to the  
EEPROM in the address given by the EEARL Register. For the EEPROM read operation, the  
EEDR contains the data read out from the EEPROM at the address given by EEARL.  
20  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
5.5.3  
EECR – EEPROM Control Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
EEPM1  
R/W  
X
4
EEPM0  
R/W  
X
3
EERIE  
R/W  
0
2
EEMPE  
R/W  
0
1
EEPE  
R/W  
X
0
EERE  
R/W  
0
EECR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is reserved for future use and will always read as 0 in ATtiny13. For compatibility with  
future AVR devices, always write this bit to zero. After reading, mask out this bit.  
• Bit 6 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is reserved in the ATtiny13 and will always read as zero.  
• Bits 5:4 – EEPM[1:0]: EEPROM Programming Mode Bits  
The EEPROM Programming mode bits setting defines which programming action that will be  
triggered when writing EEPE. It is possible to program data in one atomic operation (erase the  
old value and program the new value) or to split the Erase and Write operations in two different  
operations. The Programming times for the different modes are shown in Table 5-1 on page 21.  
While EEPE is set, any write to EEPMn will be ignored. During reset, the EEPMn bits will be  
reset to 0b00 unless the EEPROM is busy programming.  
Table 5-1.  
EEPROM Mode Bits  
Programming  
EEPM1  
EEPM0  
Time  
3.4 ms  
1.8 ms  
1.8 ms  
Operation  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Erase and Write in one operation (Atomic Operation)  
Erase Only  
Write Only  
Reserved for future use  
• Bit 3 – EERIE: EEPROM Ready Interrupt Enable  
Writing EERIE to one enables the EEPROM Ready Interrupt if the I-bit in SREG is set. Writing  
EERIE to zero disables the interrupt. The EEPROM Ready Interrupt generates a constant inter-  
rupt when Non-volatile memory is ready for programming.  
• Bit 2 – EEMPE: EEPROM Master Program Enable  
The EEMPE bit determines whether writing EEPE to one will have effect or not.  
When EEMPE is set, setting EEPE within four clock cycles will program the EEPROM at the  
selected address. If EEMPE is zero, setting EEPE will have no effect. When EEMPE has been  
written to one by software, hardware clears the bit to zero after four clock cycles.  
• Bit 1 – EEPE: EEPROM Program Enable  
The EEPROM Program Enable Signal EEPE is the programming enable signal to the EEPROM.  
When EEPE is written, the EEPROM will be programmed according to the EEPMn bits setting.  
The EEMPE bit must be written to one before a logical one is written to EEPE, otherwise no  
EEPROM write takes place. When the write access time has elapsed, the EEPE bit is cleared by  
hardware. When EEPE has been set, the CPU is halted for two cycles before the next instruction  
is executed.  
21  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
• Bit 0 – EERE: EEPROM Read Enable  
The EEPROM Read Enable Signal – EERE – is the read strobe to the EEPROM. When the cor-  
rect address is set up in the EEARL Register, the EERE bit must be written to one to trigger the  
EEPROM read. The EEPROM read access takes one instruction, and the requested data is  
available immediately. When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is halted for four cycles before the  
next instruction is executed. The user should poll the EEPE bit before starting the read opera-  
tion. If a write operation is in progress, it is neither possible to read the EEPROM, nor to change  
the EEARL Register.  
22  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
6. System Clock and Clock Options  
6.1  
Clock Systems and their Distribution  
Figure 6-1 presents the principal clock systems in the AVR and their distribution. All of the clocks  
need not be active at a given time. In order to reduce power consumption, the clocks to modules  
not being used can be halted by using different sleep modes, as described in “Power Manage-  
ment and Sleep Modes” on page 30. The clock systems are detailed below.  
Figure 6-1. Clock Distribution  
General I/O  
Modules  
Flash and  
EEPROM  
ADC  
CPU Core  
RAM  
clkI/O  
clkCPU  
AVR Clock  
Control Unit  
clkADC  
clkFLASH  
Reset Logic  
Watchdog Timer  
Source clock  
Watchdog clock  
Clock  
Multiplexer  
Watchdog  
Oscillator  
Calibrated RC  
Oscillator  
External Clock  
6.1.1  
CPU Clock – clkCPU  
The CPU clock is routed to parts of the system concerned with operation of the AVR core.  
Examples of such modules are the General Purpose Register File, the Status Register and the  
Data memory holding the Stack Pointer. Halting the CPU clock inhibits the core from performing  
general operations and calculations.  
6.1.2  
6.1.3  
I/O Clock – clkI/O  
The I/O clock is used by the majority of the I/O modules, like Timer/Counter. The I/O clock is  
also used by the External Interrupt module, but note that some external interrupts are detected  
by asynchronous logic, allowing such interrupts to be detected even if the I/O clock is halted.  
Flash Clock – clkFLASH  
The Flash clock controls operation of the Flash interface. The Flash clock is usually active simul-  
taneously with the CPU clock.  
23  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
6.1.4  
ADC Clock – clkADC  
The ADC is provided with a dedicated clock domain. This allows halting the CPU and I/O clocks  
in order to reduce noise generated by digital circuitry. This gives more accurate ADC conversion  
results.  
6.2  
Clock Sources  
The device has the following clock source options, selectable by Flash fuse bits as shown  
below. The clock from the selected source is input to the AVR clock generator, and routed to the  
appropriate modules.  
Table 6-1.  
Device Clocking Options Select  
Device Clocking Option  
CKSEL1:0(1)  
External Clock (see page 24)  
00  
01, 10  
11  
Calibrated Internal 4.8/9.6 MHz Oscillator (see page 25)  
Internal 128 kHz Oscillator (see page 26)  
Note:  
1. For all fuses “1” means unprogrammed while “0” means programmed.  
The various choices for each clocking option is given in the following sections. When the CPU  
wakes up from Power-down or Power-save, the selected clock source is used to time the start-  
up, ensuring stable Oscillator operation before instruction execution starts. When the CPU starts  
from reset, there is an additional delay allowing the power to reach a stable level before com-  
mencing normal operation. The Watchdog Oscillator is used for timing this real-time part of the  
start-up time. The number of WDT Oscillator cycles used for each time-out is shown in Table 6-  
2.  
Table 6-2.  
Number of Watchdog Oscillator Cycles  
Typ Time-out  
4 ms  
Number of Cycles  
512  
64 ms  
8K (8,192)  
6.2.1  
External Clock  
To drive the device from an external clock source, CLKI should be driven as shown in Figure 6-  
2. To run the device on an external clock, the CKSEL fuses must be programmed to “00”.  
Figure 6-2. External Clock Drive Configuration  
EXTERNAL  
CLKI  
GND  
CLOCK  
SIGNAL  
24  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
When this clock source is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT fuses as shown in  
Table 6-3.  
Table 6-3.  
Start-up Times for the External Clock Selection  
Start-up Time from  
Power-down and Power-save  
Additional Delay  
from Reset  
Recommended  
Usage  
SUT1..0  
00  
6 CK  
6 CK  
6 CK  
14CK  
BOD enabled  
01  
14CK + 4 ms  
14CK + 64 ms  
Reserved  
Fast rising power  
10  
Slowly rising power  
11  
When applying an external clock, it is required to avoid sudden changes in the applied clock fre-  
quency to ensure stable operation of the MCU. A variation in frequency of more than 2% from  
one clock cycle to the next can lead to unpredictable behavior. It is required to ensure that the  
MCU is kept in Reset during such changes in the clock frequency.  
Note that the System Clock Prescaler can be used to implement run-time changes of the internal  
clock frequency while still ensuring stable operation. Refer to “System Clock Prescaler” on page  
26 for details.  
6.2.2  
Calibrated Internal 4.8/9.6 MHz Oscillator  
The calibrated internal oscillator provides a 4.8 or 9.6 MHz clock source. The frequency is nomi-  
nal at 3V and 25°C. If the frequency exceeds the specification of the device (depends on VCC),  
the CKDIV8 fuse must be programmed so that the internal clock is divided by 8 during start-up.  
See “System Clock Prescaler” on page 26. for more details.  
The internal oscillator is selected as the system clock by programming the CKSEL fuses as  
shown in Table 6-4. If selected, it will operate with no external components.  
Table 6-4.  
Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator Operating Modes  
CKSEL1..0  
10(1)  
Nominal Frequency  
9.6 MHz  
4.8 MHz  
01  
Note:  
1. The device is shipped with this option selected.  
During reset, hardware loads the calibration data into the OSCCAL register and thereby auto-  
matically calibrates the oscillator. There are separate calibration bytes for 4.8 and 9.6 MHz  
operation but only one is automatically loaded during reset (see section “Calibration Bytes” on  
page 104). This is because the only difference between 4.8 MHz and 9.6 MHz mode is an inter-  
nal clock divider.  
By changing the OSCCAL register from SW, see “OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Register” on  
page 27, it is possible to get a higher calibration accuracy than by using the factory calibration.  
See “Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator Accuracy” on page 118.  
When this oscillator is used as the chip clock, the Watchdog Oscillator will still be used for the  
Watchdog Timer and for the Reset Time-out. For more information on the pre-programmed cali-  
bration value, see the section “Calibration Bytes” on page 104.  
25  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
When this Oscillator is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT fuses as shown in  
Table 6-5.  
Table 6-5.  
Start-up Times for the Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator Clock Selection  
Start-up Time  
from Power-down  
Additional Delay from  
Reset (VCC = 5.0V)  
SUT1..0  
00  
Recommended Usage  
BOD enabled  
6 CK  
6 CK  
6 CK  
14CK  
01  
14CK + 4 ms  
14CK + 64 ms  
Reserved  
Fast rising power  
10(1)  
Slowly rising power  
11  
Note:  
1. The device is shipped with this option selected.  
6.2.3  
Internal 128 kHz Oscillator  
The 128 kHz internal Oscillator is a low power Oscillator providing a clock of 128 kHz. The fre-  
quency depends on supply voltage, temperature and batch variations. This clock may be select  
as the system clock by programming the CKSEL fuses to “11”.  
When this clock source is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT fuses as shown in  
Table 6-6.  
Table 6-6.  
Start-up Times for the 128 kHz Internal Oscillator  
Start-up Time from  
Power-down and Power-save  
Additional Delay  
from Reset  
Recommended  
Usage  
SUT1:0  
00  
6 CK  
6 CK  
6 CK  
14CK  
BOD enabled  
01  
14CK + 4 ms  
14CK + 64 ms  
Reserved  
Fast rising power  
10  
Slowly rising power  
11  
6.2.4  
Default Clock Source  
The device is shipped with CKSEL = “10”, SUT = “10”, and CKDIV8 programmed. The default  
clock source setting is therefore the Internal RC Oscillator running at 9.6 MHz with longest start-  
up time and an initial system clock prescaling of 8. This default setting ensures that all users can  
make their desired clock source setting using an In-System or High-voltage Programmer.  
6.3  
System Clock Prescaler  
The ATtiny13 system clock can be divided by setting the “CLKPR – Clock Prescale Register” on  
page 28. This feature can be used to decrease power consumption when the requirement for  
processing power is low. This can be used with all clock source options, and it will affect the  
clock frequency of the CPU and all synchronous peripherals. clkI/O, clkADC, clkCPU, and clkFLASH  
are divided by a factor as shown in Table 6-8 on page 28.  
6.3.1  
Switching Time  
When switching between prescaler settings, the System Clock Prescaler ensures that no  
glitches occur in the clock system and that no intermediate frequency is higher than neither the  
clock frequency corresponding to the previous setting, nor the clock frequency corresponding to  
the new setting.  
26  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
The ripple counter that implements the prescaler runs at the frequency of the undivided clock,  
which may be faster than the CPU’s clock frequency. Hence, it is not possible to determine the  
state of the prescaler – even if it were readable, and the exact time it takes to switch from one  
clock division to another cannot be exactly predicted.  
From the time the CLKPS values are written, it takes between T1 + T2 and T1 + 2*T2 before the  
new clock frequency is active. In this interval, 2 active clock edges are produced. Here, T1 is the  
previous clock period, and T2 is the period corresponding to the new prescaler setting.  
6.4  
Register Description  
6.4.1  
OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CAL6  
R/W  
CAL5  
R/W  
CAL4  
R/W  
CAL3  
R/W  
CAL2  
R/W  
CAL1  
R/W  
CAL0  
R/W  
OSCCAL  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
Device Specific Calibration Value  
• Bit 7 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is reserved bit in ATtiny13 and it will always read zero.  
• Bits 6:0 – CAL[6:0]: Oscillator Calibration Value  
Writing the calibration byte to this address will trim the internal Oscillator to remove process vari-  
ations from the Oscillator frequency. This is done automatically during Chip Reset. When  
OSCCAL is zero, the lowest available frequency is chosen. Writing non-zero values to this regis-  
ter will increase the frequency of the internal Oscillator. Writing 0x7F to the register gives the  
highest available frequency.  
The calibrated Oscillator is used to time EEPROM and Flash access. If EEPROM or Flash is  
written, do not calibrate to more than 10% above the nominal frequency. Otherwise, the  
EEPROM or Flash write may fail. Note that the Oscillator is intended for calibration to 9.6 MHz or  
4.8 MHz. Tuning to other values is not guaranteed, as indicated in Table 6-7 below.  
To ensure stable operation of the MCU the calibration value should be changed in small steps. A  
variation in frequency of more than 2% from one cycle to the next can lead to unpredicatble  
behavior. Changes in OSCCAL should not exceed 0x20 for each calibration. It is required to  
ensure that the MCU is kept in Reset during such changes in the clock frequency  
Table 6-7.  
Internal RC Oscillator Frequency Range  
Typical Lowest Frequency  
Typical Highest Frequency  
OSCCAL Value  
0x00  
with Respect to Nominal Frequency  
with Respect to Nominal Frequency  
50%  
75%  
100%  
150%  
200%  
0x3F  
0x7F  
100%  
27  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
6.4.2  
CLKPR – Clock Prescale Register  
Bit  
7
CLKPCE  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CLKPS3  
R/W  
CLKPS2  
R/W  
CLKPS1  
R/W  
CLKPS0  
R/W  
CLKPR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
See Bit Description  
• Bit 7 – CLKPCE: Clock Prescaler Change Enable  
The CLKPCE bit must be written to logic one to enable change of the CLKPS bits. The CLKPCE  
bit is only updated when the other bits in CLKPR are simultaneously written to zero. CLKPCE is  
cleared by hardware four cycles after it is written or when the CLKPS bits are written. Rewriting  
the CLKPCE bit within this time-out period does neither extend the time-out period, nor clear the  
CLKPCE bit.  
• Bits 6:4 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13 and will always read as zero.  
• Bits 3:0 – CLKPS3:0: Clock Prescaler Select Bits 3 - 0  
These bits define the division factor between the selected clock source and the internal system  
clock. These bits can be written run-time to vary the clock frequency to suit the application  
requirements. As the divider divides the master clock input to the MCU, the speed of all synchro-  
nous peripherals is reduced when a division factor is used. The division factors are given in  
Table 6-8 on page 28.  
To avoid unintentional changes of clock frequency, a special write procedure must be followed  
to change the CLKPS bits:  
1. Write the Clock Prescaler Change Enable (CLKPCE) bit to one and all other bits in  
CLKPR to zero.  
2. Within four cycles, write the desired value to CLKPS while writing a zero to CLKPCE.  
Interrupts must be disabled when changing prescaler setting to make sure the write procedure is  
not interrupted.hee setting. The Application software must ensure that a sufficient division factor  
is chosen if the selected clock source has a higher frequency than the maximum frequency of  
the device at the present operating conditions. The device is shipped with the CKDIV8 fuse  
programmed.  
Table 6-8.  
Clock Prescaler Select  
CLKPS3  
CLKPS2  
CLKPS1  
CLKPS0  
Clock Division Factor  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
4
8
16  
32  
64  
128  
256  
28  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Table 6-8.  
Clock Prescaler Select (Continued)  
CLKPS3  
CLKPS2  
CLKPS1  
CLKPS0  
Clock Division Factor  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
29  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
7. Power Management and Sleep Modes  
The high performance and industry leading code efficiency makes the AVR microcontrollers an  
ideal choise for low power applications. In addition, sleep modes enable the application to shut  
down unused modules in the MCU, thereby saving power. The AVR provides various sleep  
modes allowing the user to tailor the power consumption to the application’s requirements.  
7.1  
Sleep Modes  
Figure 6-1 on page 23 presents the different clock systems in the ATtiny13, and their distribu-  
tion. The figure is helpful in selecting an appropriate sleep mode. Table 7-1 shows the different  
sleep modes and their wake up sources.  
Table 7-1.  
Active Clock Domains and Wake-up Sources in the Different Sleep Modes  
Active Clock Domains  
Oscillators  
Wake-up Sources  
Sleep Mode  
Idle  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ADC Noise  
Reduction  
X
X(1)  
X(1)  
Power-down  
Note:  
1. For INT0, only level interrupt.  
To enter any of the three sleep modes, the SE bit in MCUCR must be written to logic one and a  
SLEEP instruction must be executed. The SM1..0 bits in the MCUCR Register select which  
sleep mode (Idle, ADC Noise Reduction, or Power-down) will be activated by the SLEEP instruc-  
tion. See Table 7-2 on page 33 for a summary.  
If an enabled interrupt occurs while the MCU is in a sleep mode, the MCU wakes up. The MCU  
is then halted for four cycles in addition to the start-up time, executes the interrupt routine, and  
resumes execution from the instruction following SLEEP. The contents of the Register File and  
SRAM are unaltered when the device wakes up from sleep. If a reset occurs during sleep mode,  
the MCU wakes up and executes from the Reset Vector.  
Note that if a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from Power-down mode, the changed  
level must be held for some time to wake up the MCU. Refer to “External Interrupts” on page 45  
for details.  
7.1.1  
Idle Mode  
When the SM[1:0] bits are written to 00, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Idle mode,  
stopping the CPU but allowing Analog Comparator, ADC, Timer/Counter, Watchdog, and the  
interrupt system to continue operating. This sleep mode basically halts clkCPU and clkFLASH, while  
allowing the other clocks to run.  
Idle mode enables the MCU to wake up from external triggered interrupts as well as internal  
ones like the Timer Overflow. If wake-up from the Analog Comparator interrupt is not required,  
the Analog Comparator can be powered down by setting the ACD bit in the Analog Comparator  
30  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Control and Status Register – ACSR. This will reduce power consumption in Idle mode. If the  
ADC is enabled, a conversion starts automatically when this mode is entered.  
7.1.2  
ADC Noise Reduction Mode  
When the SM[1:0] bits are written to 01, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter ADC  
Noise Reduction mode, stopping the CPU but allowing the ADC, the external interrupts, and the  
Watchdog to continue operating (if enabled). This sleep mode halts clkI/O, clkCPU, and clkFLASH  
while allowing the other clocks to run.  
,
This improves the noise environment for the ADC, enabling higher resolution measurements. If  
the ADC is enabled, a conversion starts automatically when this mode is entered. Apart form the  
ADC Conversion Complete interrupt, only an External Reset, a Watchdog Reset, a Brown-out  
Reset, an SPM/EEPROM ready interrupt, an external level interrupt on INT0 or a pin change  
interrupt can wake up the MCU from ADC Noise Reduction mode.  
7.1.3  
Power-down Mode  
When the SM[1:0] bits are written to 10, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Power-  
down mode. In this mode, the Oscillator is stopped, while the external interrupts, and the Watch-  
dog continue operating (if enabled). Only an External Reset, a Watchdog Reset, a Brown-out  
Reset, an external level interrupt on INT0, or a pin change interrupt can wake up the MCU. This  
sleep mode halts all generated clocks, allowing operation of asynchronous modules only.  
7.2  
Minimizing Power Consumption  
There are several issues to consider when trying to minimize the power consumption in an AVR  
controlled system. In general, sleep modes should be used as much as possible, and the sleep  
mode should be selected so that as few as possible of the device’s functions are operating. All  
functions not needed should be disabled. In particular, the following modules may need special  
consideration when trying to achieve the lowest possible power consumption.  
7.2.1  
7.2.2  
Analog to Digital Converter  
If enabled, the ADC will be enabled in all sleep modes. To save power, the ADC should be dis-  
abled before entering any sleep mode. When the ADC is turned off and on again, the next  
conversion will be an extended conversion. Refer to “Analog to Digital Converter” on page 81 for  
details on ADC operation.  
Analog Comparator  
When entering Idle mode, the Analog Comparator should be disabled if not used. When entering  
ADC Noise Reduction mode, the Analog Comparator should be disabled. In the other sleep  
modes, the Analog Comparator is automatically disabled. However, if the Analog Comparator is  
set up to use the Internal Voltage Reference as input, the Analog Comparator should be dis-  
abled in all sleep modes. Otherwise, the Internal Voltage Reference will be enabled,  
independent of sleep mode. Refer to “Analog Comparator” on page 78 for details on how to con-  
figure the Analog Comparator.  
7.2.3  
Brown-out Detector  
If the Brown-out Detector is not needed in the application, this module should be turned off. If the  
Brown-out Detector is enabled by the BODLEVEL fuses, it will be enabled in all sleep modes,  
and hence, always consume power. In the deeper sleep modes, this will contribute significantly  
to the total current consumption. Refer to “Brown-out Detection” on page 36 for details on how to  
configure the Brown-out Detector.  
31  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
7.2.4  
Internal Voltage Reference  
The Internal Voltage Reference will be enabled when needed by the Brown-out Detection, the  
Analog Comparator or the ADC. If these modules are disabled as described in the sections  
above, the internal voltage reference will be disabled and it will not be consuming power. When  
turned on again, the user must allow the reference to start up before the output is used. If the  
reference is kept on in sleep mode, the output can be used immediately. Refer to “Internal Volt-  
age Reference” on page 37 for details on the start-up time.  
7.2.5  
7.2.6  
Watchdog Timer  
If the Watchdog Timer is not needed in the application, this module should be turned off. If the  
Watchdog Timer is enabled, it will be enabled in all sleep modes, and hence, always consume  
power. In the deeper sleep modes, this will contribute significantly to the total current consump-  
tion. Refer to “Interrupts” on page 44 for details on how to configure the Watchdog Timer.  
Port Pins  
When entering a sleep mode, all port pins should be configured to use minimum power. The  
most important thing is then to ensure that no pins drive resistive loads. In sleep modes where  
both the I/O clock (clkI/O) and the ADC clock (clkADC) are stopped, the input buffers of the device  
will be disabled. This ensures that no power is consumed by the input logic when not needed. In  
some cases, the input logic is needed for detecting wake-up conditions, and it will then be  
enabled. Refer to the section “Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes” on page 52 for details on  
which pins are enabled. If the input buffer is enabled and the input signal is left floating or has an  
analog signal level close to VCC/2, the input buffer will use excessive power.  
For analog input pins, the digital input buffer should be disabled at all times. An analog signal  
level close to VCC/2 on an input pin can cause significant current even in active mode. Digital  
input buffers can be disabled by writing to the Digital Input Disable Register (DIDR0). Refer to  
“DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0” on page 80 for details.  
7.3  
Register Description  
7.3.1  
MCUCR – MCU Control Register  
The MCU Control Register contains control bits for power management.  
Bit  
7
6
5
SE  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
R
0
1
ISC01  
R/W  
0
0
ISC00  
R/W  
0
PUD  
R/W  
0
SM1  
R/W  
0
SM0  
R/W  
0
MCUCR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
• Bit 5 – SE: Sleep Enable  
The SE bit must be written to logic one to make the MCU enter the sleep mode when the SLEEP  
instruction is executed. To avoid the MCU entering the sleep mode unless it is the programmer’s  
purpose, it is recommended to write the Sleep Enable (SE) bit to one just before the execution of  
the SLEEP instruction and to clear it immediately after waking up.  
32  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
• Bits 4:3 – SM[1:0]: Sleep Mode Select Bits 1:0  
These bits select between the three available sleep modes as shown in Table 7-2 on page 33.  
Table 7-2.  
Sleep Mode Select  
SM1  
SM0  
Sleep Mode  
Idle  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
ADC Noise Reduction  
Power-down  
Reserved  
• Bit 2 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny13 and will always read as zero.  
33  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
8. System Control and Reset  
8.0.1  
Resetting the AVR  
During reset, all I/O Registers are set to their initial values, and the program starts execution  
from the Reset Vector. The instruction placed at the Reset Vector must be a RJMP – Relative  
Jump – instruction to the reset handling routine. If the program never enables an interrupt  
source, the Interrupt Vectors are not used, and regular program code can be placed at these  
locations. The circuit diagram in Figure 8-1 on page 34 shows the reset logic. “System and  
Reset Characteristics” on page 119 defines the electrical parameters of the reset circuitry.  
Figure 8-1. Reset Logic  
DATA BUS  
MCU Status  
Register (MCUSR)  
Power-on Reset  
Circuit  
Brown-out  
Reset Circuit  
BODLEVEL [1..0]  
Pull-up Resistor  
SPIKE  
FILTER  
Watchdog  
Oscillator  
Delay Counters  
Clock  
CK  
Generator  
TIMEOUT  
CKSEL[1:0]  
SUT[1:0]  
The I/O ports of the AVR are immediately reset to their initial state when a reset source goes  
active. This does not require any clock source to be running.  
After all reset sources have gone inactive, a delay counter is invoked, stretching the internal  
reset. This allows the power to reach a stable level before normal operation starts. The time-out  
period of the delay counter is defined by the user through the SUT and CKSEL fuses. The differ-  
ent selections for the delay period are presented in “Clock Sources” on page 24.  
34  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
8.1  
Reset Sources  
The ATtiny13 has four sources of reset:  
• Power-on Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage is below the Power-on Reset  
threshold (VPOT).  
• External Reset. The MCU is reset when a low level is present on the RESET pin for longer  
than the minimum pulse length.  
• Watchdog Reset. The MCU is reset when the Watchdog Timer period expires and the  
Watchdog is enabled.  
• Brown-out Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage VCC is below the Brown-out  
Reset threshold (VBOT) and the Brown-out Detector is enabled.  
8.1.1  
Power-on Reset  
A Power-on Reset (POR) pulse is generated by an On-chip detection circuit. The detection level  
is defined in “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 119. The POR is activated whenever  
V
CC is below the detection level. The POR circuit can be used to trigger the Start-up Reset, as  
well as to detect a failure in supply voltage.  
A Power-on Reset (POR) circuit ensures that the device is reset from Power-on. Reaching the  
Power-on Reset threshold voltage invokes the delay counter, which determines how long the  
device is kept in RESET after VCC rise. The RESET signal is activated again, without any delay,  
when VCC decreases below the detection level.  
Figure 8-2. MCU Start-up, RESET Tied to VCC  
VPOT  
VCC  
VRST  
RESET  
tTOUT  
TIME-OUT  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
Figure 8-3. MCU Start-up, RESET Extended Externally  
VPOT  
VCC  
VRST  
RESET  
tTOUT  
TIME-OUT  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
35  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
8.1.2  
External Reset  
An External Reset is generated by a low level on the RESET pin if enabled. Reset pulses longer  
than the minimum pulse width (See “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 119.) will gen-  
erate a reset, even if the clock is not running. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a  
reset. When the applied signal reaches the Reset Threshold Voltage – VRST – on its positive  
edge, the delay counter starts the MCU after the Time-out period – tTOUT – has expired.  
Figure 8-4. External Reset During Operation  
CC  
8.1.3  
Brown-out Detection  
ATtiny13 has an On-chip Brown-out Detection (BOD) circuit for monitoring the VCC level during  
operation by comparing it to a fixed trigger level. The trigger level for the BOD can be selected  
by the BODLEVEL fuses. The trigger level has a hysteresis to ensure spike free Brown-out  
Detection. The hysteresis on the detection level should be interpreted as VBOT+ = VBOT + VHYST/2  
and VBOT- = VBOT - VHYST/2.  
When the BOD is enabled, and VCC decreases to a value below the trigger level (VBOT- in Figure  
8-5 on page 36), the Brown-out Reset is immediately activated. When VCC increases above the  
trigger level (VBOT+ in Figure 8-5 on page 36), the delay counter starts the MCU after the Time-  
out period tTOUT has expired.  
The BOD circuit will only detect a drop in VCC if the voltage stays below the trigger level for lon-  
ger than tBOD given in “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 119.  
Figure 8-5. Brown-out Reset During Operation  
VBOT+  
VCC  
VBOT-  
RESET  
t
TOUT  
TIME-OUT  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
36  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
8.1.4  
Watchdog Reset  
When the Watchdog times out, it will generate a short reset pulse of one CK cycle duration. On  
the falling edge of this pulse, the delay timer starts counting the Time-out period tTOUT. Refer to  
“Interrupts” on page 44 for details on operation of the Watchdog Timer.  
Figure 8-6. Watchdog Reset During Operation  
CC  
CK  
8.2  
Internal Voltage Reference  
ATtiny13 features an internal bandgap reference. This reference is used for Brown-out Detec-  
tion, and it can be used as an input to the Analog Comparator or the ADC.  
8.2.1  
Voltage Reference Enable Signals and Start-up Time  
The voltage reference has a start-up time that may influence the way it should be used. The  
start-up time is given in “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 119. To save power, the  
reference is not always turned on. The reference is on during the following situations:  
• When the BOD is enabled (by programming the BODLEVEL [1..0] fuse).  
• When the bandgap reference is connected to the Analog Comparator (by setting the ACBG  
bit in ACSR).  
• When the ADC is enabled.  
Thus, when the BOD is not enabled, after setting the ACBG bit or enabling the ADC, the user  
must always allow the reference to start up before the output from the Analog Comparator or  
ADC is used. To reduce power consumption in Power-down mode, the user can avoid the three  
conditions above to ensure that the reference is turned off before entering Power-down mode.  
8.3  
Watchdog Timer  
ATtiny13 has an Enhanced Watchdog Timer (WDT). The WDT is a timer counting cycles of a  
separate on-chip 128 kHz oscillator. The WDT gives an interrupt or a system reset when the  
counter reaches a given time-out value. In normal operation mode, it is required that the system  
uses the WDR - Watchdog Timer Reset - instruction to restart the counter before the time-out  
37  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
value is reached. If the system doesn't restart the counter, an interrupt or system reset will be  
issued.  
Figure 8-7. Watchdog Timer  
128kHz  
OSCILLATOR  
WDP0  
WDP1  
WATCHDOG  
WDP2  
RESET  
WDP3  
WDE  
MCU RESET  
WDTIF  
INTERRUPT  
WDTIE  
In Interrupt mode, the WDT gives an interrupt when the timer expires. This interrupt can be used  
to wake the device from sleep-modes, and also as a general system timer. One example is to  
limit the maximum time allowed for certain operations, giving an interrupt when the operation  
has run longer than expected. In System Reset mode, the WDT gives a reset when the timer  
expires. This is typically used to prevent system hang-up in case of runaway code. The third  
mode, Interrupt and System Reset mode, combines the other two modes by first giving an inter-  
rupt and then switch to System Reset mode. This mode will for instance allow a safe shutdown  
by saving critical parameters before a system reset.  
The Watchdog always on (WDTON) fuse, if programmed, will force the Watchdog Timer to Sys-  
tem Reset mode. With the fuse programmed the System Reset mode bit (WDE) and Interrupt  
mode bit (WDTIE) are locked to 1 and 0 respectively. To further ensure program security, altera-  
tions to the Watchdog set-up must follow timed sequences. The sequence for clearing WDE and  
changing time-out configuration is as follows:  
1. In the same operation, write a logic one to the Watchdog change enable bit (WDCE)  
and WDE. A logic one must be written to WDE regardless of the previous value of the  
WDE bit.  
2. Within the next four clock cycles, write the WDE and Watchdog prescaler bits (WDP) as  
desired, but with the WDCE bit cleared. This must be done in one operation.  
38  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
The following code example shows one assembly and one C function for turning off the Watch-  
dog Timer. The example assumes that interrupts are controlled (e.g. by disabling interrupts  
globally) so that no interrupts will occur during the execution of these functions.  
Assembly Code Example(1)  
WDT_off:  
; Turn off global interrupt  
cli  
; Reset Watchdog Timer  
wdr  
; Clear WDRF in MCUSR  
in  
andi r16, (0xff - (1<<WDRF))  
out MCUSR, r16  
r16, MCUSR  
; Write logical one to WDCE and WDE  
; Keep old prescaler setting to prevent unintentional time-out  
in  
r16, WDTCR  
ori  
out  
r16, (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE)  
WDTCR, r16  
; Turn off WDT  
ldi  
out  
r16, (0<<WDE)  
WDTCR, r16  
; Turn on global interrupt  
sei  
ret  
C Code Example(1)  
void WDT_off(void)  
{
__disable_interrupt();  
__watchdog_reset();  
/* Clear WDRF in MCUSR */  
MCUSR &= ~(1<<WDRF);  
/* Write logical one to WDCE and WDE */  
/* Keep old prescaler setting to prevent unintentional time-out  
*/  
WDTCR |= (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE);  
/* Turn off WDT */  
WDTCR = 0x00;  
__enable_interrupt();  
}
Note:  
1. The example code assumes that the part specific header file is included.  
If the Watchdog is accidentally enabled, for example by a runaway pointer or brown-out condi-  
tion, the device will be reset and the Watchdog Timer will stay enabled. If the code is not set up  
to handle the Watchdog, this might lead to an eternal loop of time-out resets. To avoid this situa-  
39  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
tion, the application software should always clear the Watchdog System Reset Flag (WDRF)  
and the WDE control bit in the initialisation routine, even if the Watchdog is not in use.  
The following code example shows one assembly and one C function for changing the time-out  
value of the Watchdog Timer.  
Assembly Code Example(1)  
WDT_Prescaler_Change:  
; Turn off global interrupt  
cli  
; Reset Watchdog Timer  
wdr  
; Start timed sequence  
in  
r16, WDTCR  
ori  
out  
r16, (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE)  
WDTCR, r16  
; -- Got four cycles to set the new values from here -  
; Set new prescaler(time-out) value = 64K cycles (~0.5 s)  
ldi  
out  
r16, (1<<WDE) | (1<<WDP2) | (1<<WDP0)  
WDTCR, r16  
; -- Finished setting new values, used 2 cycles -  
; Turn on global interrupt  
sei  
ret  
C Code Example(1)  
void WDT_Prescaler_Change(void)  
{
__disable_interrupt();  
__watchdog_reset();  
/* Start timed sequence */  
WDTCR |= (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE);  
/* Set new prescaler(time-out) value = 64K cycles (~0.5 s) */  
WDTCR = (1<<WDE) | (1<<WDP2) | (1<<WDP0);  
__enable_interrupt();  
}
Note:  
1. The example code assumes that the part specific header file is included.  
The Watchdog Timer should be reset before any change of the WDP bits, since a change in the  
WDP bits can result in a time-out when switching to a shorter time-out period.  
40  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
8.4  
Register Description  
8.4.1  
MCUSR – MCU Status Register  
The MCU Status Register provides information on which reset source caused an MCU Reset.  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
WDRF  
R/W  
BORF  
R/W  
EXTRF  
R/W  
PORF  
R/W  
MCUSR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
See Bit Description  
• Bits 7:4 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 3 – WDRF: Watchdog Reset Flag  
This bit is set if a Watchdog Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a  
logic zero to the flag.  
• Bit 2 – BORF: Brown-out Reset Flag  
This bit is set if a Brown-out Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a  
logic zero to the flag.  
• Bit 1 – EXTRF: External Reset Flag  
This bit is set if an External Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a  
logic zero to the flag.  
• Bit 0 – PORF: Power-on Reset Flag  
This bit is set if a Power-on Reset occurs. The bit is reset only by writing a logic zero to the flag.  
To make use of the Reset Flags to identify a reset condition, the user should read and then reset  
the MCUSR as early as possible in the program. If the register is cleared before another reset  
occurs, the source of the reset can be found by examining the Reset Flags.  
8.4.2  
WDTCR – Watchdog Timer Control Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
WDP3  
R/W  
0
4
WDCE  
R/W  
0
3
2
WDP2  
R/W  
0
1
WDP1  
R/W  
0
0
WDP0  
R/W  
0
WDTIF  
WDTIE  
WDE  
R/W  
X
WDTCR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
• Bit 7 - WDTIF: Watchdog Timer Interrupt Flag  
This bit is set when a time-out occurs in the Watchdog Timer and the Watchdog Timer is config-  
ured for interrupt. WDTIF is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt  
handling vector. Alternatively, WDTIF is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit  
in SREG and WDTIE are set, the Watchdog Time-out Interrupt is executed.  
• Bit 6 - WDTIE: Watchdog Timer Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the Watchdog Interrupt is  
enabled. If WDE is cleared in combination with this setting, the Watchdog Timer is in Interrupt  
Mode, and the corresponding interrupt is executed if time-out in the Watchdog Timer occurs.  
If WDE is set, the Watchdog Timer is in Interrupt and System Reset Mode. The first time-out in  
the Watchdog Timer will set WDTIF. Executing the corresponding interrupt vector will clear  
WDTIE and WDTIF automatically by hardware (the Watchdog goes to System Reset Mode).  
41  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
This is useful for keeping the Watchdog Timer security while using the interrupt. To stay in Inter-  
rupt and System Reset Mode, WDTIE must be set after each interrupt. This should however not  
be done within the interrupt service routine itself, as this might compromise the safety-function of  
the Watchdog System Reset mode. If the interrupt is not executed before the next time-out, a  
System Reset will be applied.  
Table 8-1.  
Watchdog Timer Configuration  
WDTON(1)  
WDE  
WDTIE  
Mode  
Action on Time-out  
None  
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
Stopped  
Interrupt Mode  
System Reset Mode  
Interrupt  
Reset  
Interrupt and System Reset  
Mode  
Interrupt, then go to System  
Reset Mode  
1
0
1
x
1
x
System Reset Mode  
Reset  
Note:  
1. WDTON fuse set to “0“ means programmed and “1“ means unprogrammed.  
• Bit 4 - WDCE: Watchdog Change Enable  
This bit is used in timed sequences for changing WDE and prescaler bits. To clear the WDE bit,  
and/or change the prescaler bits, WDCE must be set.  
Once written to one, hardware will clear WDCE after four clock cycles.  
• Bit 3 - WDE: Watchdog System Reset Enable  
WDE is overridden by WDRF in MCUSR. This means that WDE is always set when WDRF is  
set. To clear WDE, WDRF must be cleared first. This feature ensures multiple resets during con-  
ditions causing failure, and a safe start-up after the failure.  
• Bit 5, 2:0 - WDP[3:0]: Watchdog Timer Prescaler 3, 2, 1 and 0  
The WDP[3:0] bits determine the Watchdog Timer prescaling when the Watchdog Timer is run-  
ning. The different prescaling values and their corresponding time-out periods are shown in  
Table 8-2 on page 42..  
Table 8-2.  
Watchdog Timer Prescale Select  
Number of WDT Oscillator  
Typical Time-out at  
VCC = 5.0V  
WDP3  
WDP2  
WDP1  
WDP0  
Cycles  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2K (2048) cycles  
16 ms  
32 ms  
64 ms  
0.125 s  
0.25 s  
0.5 s  
4K (4096) cycles  
8K (8192) cycles  
16K (16384) cycles  
32K (32768) cycles  
64K (65536) cycles  
128K (131072) cycles  
256K (262144) cycles  
512K (524288) cycles  
1024K (1048576) cycles  
1.0 s  
2.0 s  
4.0 s  
8.0 s  
42  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Table 8-2.  
Watchdog Timer Prescale Select  
Number of WDT Oscillator  
Typical Time-out at  
VCC = 5.0V  
WDP3  
WDP2  
WDP1  
WDP0  
Cycles  
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Reserved  
43  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
9. Interrupts  
This section describes the specifics of the interrupt handling as performed in ATtiny13. For a  
general explanation of the AVR interrupt handling, refer to “Reset and Interrupt Handling” on  
page 12.  
9.1  
Interrupt Vectors  
The interrupt vectors of ATtiny13 are described in Table 9-1 below.  
Table 9-1.  
Vector No.  
Reset and Interrupt Vectors  
Program Address  
Source  
Interrupt Definition  
External Pin, Power-on Reset,  
Brown-out Reset, Watchdog Reset  
1
0x0000  
RESET  
2
3
0x0001  
0x0002  
0x0003  
0x0004  
0x0005  
0x0006  
0x0007  
0x0008  
0x0009  
INT0  
External Interrupt Request 0  
Pin Change Interrupt Request 0  
Timer/Counter Overflow  
EEPROM Ready  
PCINT0  
4
TIM0_OVF  
EE_RDY  
ANA_COMP  
TIM0_COMPA  
TIM0_COMPB  
WDT  
5
6
Analog Comparator  
7
Timer/Counter Compare Match A  
Timer/Counter Compare Match B  
Watchdog Time-out  
8
9
10  
ADC  
ADC Conversion Complete  
If the program never enables an interrupt source, the Interrupt Vectors are not used, and regular  
program code can be placed at these locations.  
The most typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses in  
ATtiny13 is:  
Address Labels Code  
Comments  
0x0000  
0x0001  
0x0002  
0x0003  
0x0004  
0x0005  
0x0006  
0x0007  
0x0008  
0x0009  
;
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
RESET  
; Reset Handler  
EXT_INT0  
PCINT0  
; IRQ0 Handler  
; PCINT0 Handler  
TIM0_OVF  
EE_RDY  
; Timer0 Overflow Handler  
; EEPROM Ready Handler  
; Analog Comparator Handler  
; Timer0 CompareA Handler  
; Timer0 CompareB Handler  
; Watchdog Interrupt Handler  
; ADC Conversion Handler  
ANA_COMP  
TIM0_COMPA  
TIM0_COMPB  
WATCHDOG  
ADC  
0x000A RESET: ldi  
r16, low(RAMEND); Main program start  
SPL,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM  
sei ; Enable interrupts  
<instr> xxx  
... ... ...  
0x000B  
0x000C  
0x000D  
...  
out  
44  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
9.2  
External Interrupts  
The External Interrupts are triggered by the INT0 pin or any of the PCINT5..0 pins. Observe that,  
if enabled, the interrupts will trigger even if the INT0 or PCINT5..0 pins are configured as out-  
puts. This feature provides a way of generating a software interrupt. Pin change interrupts PCI  
will trigger if any enabled PCINT5..0 pin toggles. The PCMSK Register control which pins con-  
tribute to the pin change interrupts. Pin change interrupts on PCINT5..0 are detected  
asynchronously. This implies that these interrupts can be used for waking the part also from  
sleep modes other than Idle mode.  
The INT0 interrupts can be triggered by a falling or rising edge or a low level. This is set up as  
indicated in the specification for the MCU Control Register – MCUCR. When the INT0 interrupt is  
enabled and is configured as level triggered, the interrupt will trigger as long as the pin is held  
low. Note that recognition of falling or rising edge interrupts on INT0 requires the presence of an  
I/O clock, described in “Clock Systems and their Distribution” on page 23.  
9.2.1  
Low Level Interrupt  
A low level interrupt on INT0 is detected asynchronously. This implies that this interrupt can be  
used for waking the part also from sleep modes other than Idle mode. The I/O clock is halted in  
all sleep modes except Idle mode.  
Note that if a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from Power-down, the required level  
must be held long enough for the MCU to complete the wake-up to trigger the level interrupt. If  
the level disappears before the end of the Start-up Time, the MCU will still wake up, but no inter-  
rupt will be generated. The start-up time is defined by the SUT and CKSEL fuses as described in  
“System Clock and Clock Options” on page 23.  
If the low level on the interrupt pin is removed before the device has woken up then program  
execution will not be diverted to the interrupt service routine but continue from the instruction fol-  
lowing the SLEEP command.  
9.2.2  
Pin Change Interrupt Timing  
An example of timing of a pin change interrupt is shown in Figure 9-1 below.  
Figure 9-1. Timing of pin change interrupts  
pin_lat  
pcint_in_(0)  
PCINT(0)  
0
x
D
Q
pcint_syn  
pcint_setflag  
PCIF  
pin_sync  
PCINT(0) in PCMSK(x)  
LE  
clk  
clk  
clk  
PCINT(n)  
pin_lat  
pin_sync  
pcint_in_(n)  
pcint_syn  
pcint_setflag  
PCIF  
45  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
9.3  
Register Description  
9.3.1  
MCUCR – MCU Control Register  
The External Interrupt Control Register A contains control bits for interrupt sense control.  
Bit  
7
6
5
SE  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
1
ISC01  
R/W  
0
0
ISC00  
R/W  
0
PUD  
R/W  
0
SM1  
R/W  
0
SM0  
R/W  
0
MCUCR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
• Bits 1, 0 – ISC01, ISC00: Interrupt Sense Control 0 Bit 1 and Bit 0  
The External Interrupt 0 is activated by the external pin INT0 if the SREG I-flag and the corre-  
sponding interrupt mask are set. The level and edges on the external INT0 pin that activate the  
interrupt are defined in Table 9-2 on page 46. The value on the INT0 pin is sampled before  
detecting edges. If edge or toggle interrupt is selected, pulses that last longer than one clock  
period will generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate an interrupt. If  
low level interrupt is selected, the low level must be held until the completion of the currently  
executing instruction to generate an interrupt.  
Table 9-2.  
Interrupt 0 Sense Control  
ISC01  
ISC00  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The low level of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
Any logical change on INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
The falling edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
The rising edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
9.3.2  
GIMSK – General Interrupt Mask Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
PCIE  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
1
0
INT0  
R/W  
0
GIMSK  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7, 4:0 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 6 – INT0: External Interrupt Request 0 Enable  
When the INT0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), the exter-  
nal pin interrupt is enabled. The Interrupt Sense Control0 bits 1/0 (ISC01 and ISC00) in the MCU  
Control Register (MCUCR) define whether the external interrupt is activated on rising and/or fall-  
ing edge of the INT0 pin or level sensed. Activity on the pin will cause an interrupt request even  
if INT0 is configured as an output. The corresponding interrupt of External Interrupt Request 0 is  
executed from the INT0 Interrupt Vector.  
• Bit 5 – PCIE: Pin Change Interrupt Enable  
When the PCIE bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), pin  
change interrupt is enabled. Any change on any enabled PCINT5..0 pin will cause an interrupt.  
The corresponding interrupt of Pin Change Interrupt Request is executed from the PCI Interrupt  
Vector. PCINT5..0 pins are enabled individually by the PCMSK Register.  
46  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
9.3.3  
GIFR – General Interrupt Flag Register  
Bit  
7
6
INTF0  
R/W  
0
5
PCIF  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
1
0
R
0
GIFR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7, 4:0 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 6 – INTF0: External Interrupt Flag 0  
When an edge or logic change on the INT0 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF0 becomes set  
(one). If the I-bit in SREG and the INT0 bit in GIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the cor-  
responding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed.  
Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it. This flag is always cleared  
when INT0 is configured as a level interrupt.  
• Bit 5 – PCIF: Pin Change Interrupt Flag  
When a logic change on any PCINT5:0 pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF becomes set  
(one). If the I-bit in SREG and the PCIE bit in GIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the cor-  
responding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed.  
Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it.  
9.3.4  
PCMSK – Pin Change Mask Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
PCINT5  
R/W  
0
4
PCINT4  
R/W  
0
3
PCINT3  
R/W  
0
2
PCINT2  
R/W  
0
1
PCINT1  
R/W  
0
0
PCINT0  
R/W  
0
R
0
PCMSK  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
• Bits 7, 6 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13 and will always read as zero.  
• Bits 5:0 – PCINT5:0: Pin Change Enable Mask 5:0  
Each PCINT5:0 bit selects whether pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin.  
If PCINT5:0 is set and the PCIE bit in GIMSK is set, pin change interrupt is enabled on the cor-  
responding I/O pin. If PCINT5:0 is cleared, pin change interrupt on the corresponding I/O pin is  
disabled.  
47  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
10. I/O Ports  
10.1 Overview  
All AVR ports have true Read-Modify-Write functionality when used as general digital I/O ports.  
This means that the direction of one port pin can be changed without unintentionally changing  
the direction of any other pin with the SBI and CBI instructions. The same applies when chang-  
ing drive value (if configured as output) or enabling/disabling of pull-up resistors (if configured as  
input). Each output buffer has symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source  
capability. The pin driver is strong enough to drive LED displays directly. All port pins have indi-  
vidually selectable pull-up resistors with a supply-voltage invariant resistance. All I/O pins have  
protection diodes to both VCC and Ground as indicated in Figure 10-1. Refer to “Electrical Char-  
acteristics” on page 115 for a complete list of parameters.  
Figure 10-1. I/O Pin Equivalent Schematic  
Rpu  
Pxn  
Logic  
Cpin  
See Figure  
"General Digital I/O" for  
Details  
All registers and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “x” repre-  
sents the numbering letter for the port, and a lower case “n” represents the bit number. However,  
when using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used. For example,  
PORTB3 for bit no. 3 in Port B, here documented generally as PORTxn. The physical I/O Regis-  
ters and bit locations are listed in “Register Description” on page 56.  
Three I/O memory address locations are allocated for each port, one each for the Data Register  
– PORTx, Data Direction Register – DDRx, and the Port Input Pins – PINx. The Port Input Pins  
I/O location is read only, while the Data Register and the Data Direction Register are read/write.  
However, writing a logic one to a bit in the PINx Register, will result in a toggle in the correspond-  
ing bit in the Data Register. In addition, the Pull-up Disable – PUD bit in MCUCR disables the  
pull-up function for all pins in all ports when set.  
Using the I/O port as General Digital I/O is described in “Ports as General Digital I/O” on page  
49. Most port pins are multiplexed with alternate functions for the peripheral features on the  
device. How each alternate function interferes with the port pin is described in “Alternate Port  
Functions” on page 53. Refer to the individual module sections for a full description of the alter-  
nate functions.  
48  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Note that enabling the alternate function of some of the port pins does not affect the use of the  
other pins in the port as general digital I/O.  
10.2 Ports as General Digital I/O  
The ports are bi-directional I/O ports with optional internal pull-ups. Figure 10-2 on page 49  
shows a functional description of one I/O-port pin, here generically called Pxn.  
Figure 10-2. General Digital I/O(1)  
PUD  
Q
D
DDxn  
Q CLR  
WDx  
RDx  
RESET  
1
0
Q
D
Pxn  
PORTxn  
Q CLR  
RESET  
WPx  
WRx  
SLEEP  
RRx  
SYNCHRONIZER  
RPx  
D
Q
D
L
Q
Q
PINxn  
Q
clk I/O  
WDx:  
RDx:  
WRx:  
RRx:  
RPx:  
WPx:  
WRITE DDRx  
READ DDRx  
WRITE PORTx  
PUD:  
PULLUP DISABLE  
SLEEP CONTROL  
I/O CLOCK  
SLEEP:  
clkI/O  
:
READ PORTx REGISTER  
READ PORTx PIN  
WRITE PINx REGISTER  
Note:  
1. WRx, WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clkI/O  
SLEEP, and PUD are common to all ports.  
,
10.2.1  
Configuring the Pin  
Each port pin consists of three register bits: DDxn, PORTxn, and PINxn. As shown in “Register  
Description” on page 56, the DDxn bits are accessed at the DDRx I/O address, the PORTxn bits  
at the PORTx I/O address, and the PINxn bits at the PINx I/O address.  
The DDxn bit in the DDRx Register selects the direction of this pin. If DDxn is written logic one,  
Pxn is configured as an output pin. If DDxn is written logic zero, Pxn is configured as an input  
pin.  
49  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an input pin, the pull-up resistor is  
activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, PORTxn has to be written logic zero or the pin has to  
be configured as an output pin. The port pins are tri-stated when reset condition becomes active,  
even if no clocks are running.  
If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven  
high (one). If PORTxn is written logic zero when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port  
pin is driven low (zero).  
10.2.2  
10.2.3  
Toggling the Pin  
Writing a logic one to PINxn toggles the value of PORTxn, independent on the value of DDRxn.  
Note that the SBI instruction can be used to toggle one single bit in a port.  
Switching Between Input and Output  
When switching between tri-state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) and output high ({DDxn, PORTxn}  
= 0b11), an intermediate state with either pull-up enabled {DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01) or output  
low ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b10) must occur. Normally, the pull-up enabled state is fully accept-  
able, as a high-impedant environment will not notice the difference between a strong high driver  
and a pull-up. If this is not the case, the PUD bit in the MCUCR Register can be set to disable all  
pull-ups in all ports.  
Switching between input with pull-up and output low generates the same problem. The user  
must use either the tri-state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) or the output high state ({DDxn, PORTxn}  
= 0b10) as an intermediate step.  
Table 10-1 summarizes the control signals for the pin value.  
Table 10-1. Port Pin Configurations  
PUD  
DDxn  
PORTxn  
(in MCUCR)  
I/O  
Pull-up  
No  
Comment  
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
X
0
Input  
Tri-state (Hi-Z)  
Input  
Yes  
No  
Pxn will source current if ext. pulled low.  
Tri-state (Hi-Z)  
1
Input  
X
X
Output  
Output  
No  
Output Low (Sink)  
Output High (Source)  
No  
10.2.4  
Reading the Pin Value  
Independent of the setting of Data Direction bit DDxn, the port pin can be read through the  
PINxn Register bit. As shown in Figure 10-2 on page 49, the PINxn Register bit and the preced-  
ing latch constitute a synchronizer. This is needed to avoid metastability if the physical pin  
changes value near the edge of the internal clock, but it also introduces a delay. Figure 10-3 on  
page 51 shows a timing diagram of the synchronization when reading an externally applied pin  
value. The maximum and minimum propagation delays are denoted tpd,max and tpd,min  
respectively.  
50  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 10-3. Synchronization when Reading an Externally Applied Pin value  
SYSTEM CLK  
XXX  
XXX  
in r17, PINx  
INSTRUCTIONS  
SYNC LATCH  
PINxn  
0x00  
tpd, max  
0xFF  
r17  
tpd, min  
Consider the clock period starting shortly after the first falling edge of the system clock. The latch  
is closed when the clock is low, and goes transparent when the clock is high, as indicated by the  
shaded region of the “SYNC LATCH” signal. The signal value is latched when the system clock  
goes low. It is clocked into the PINxn Register at the succeeding positive clock edge. As indi-  
cated by the two arrows tpd,max and tpd,min, a single signal transition on the pin will be delayed  
between ½ and 1½ system clock period depending upon the time of assertion.  
When reading back a software assigned pin value, a nop instruction must be inserted as indi-  
cated in Figure 10-4 on page 51. The out instruction sets the “SYNC LATCH” signal at the  
positive edge of the clock. In this case, the delay tpd through the synchronizer is one system  
clock period.  
Figure 10-4. Synchronization when Reading a Software Assigned Pin Value  
SYSTEM CLK  
0xFF  
r16  
out PORTx, r16  
nop  
in r17, PINx  
INSTRUCTIONS  
SYNC LATCH  
PINxn  
0x00  
tpd  
0xFF  
r17  
51  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
The following code example shows how to set port B pins 0 and 1 high, 2 and 3 low, and define  
the port pins from 4 to 5 as input with a pull-up assigned to port pin 4. The resulting pin values  
are read back again, but as previously discussed, a nop instruction is included to be able to read  
back the value recently assigned to some of the pins.  
Assembly Code Example(1)  
...  
; Define pull-ups and set outputs high  
; Define directions for port pins  
ldi r16,(1<<PB4)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0)  
ldi r17,(1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0)  
out PORTB,r16  
out DDRB,r17  
; Insert nop for synchronization  
nop  
; Read port pins  
in  
r16,PINB  
...  
C Code Example  
unsigned char i;  
...  
/* Define pull-ups and set outputs high */  
/* Define directions for port pins */  
PORTB = (1<<PB4)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0);  
DDRB = (1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0);  
/* Insert nop for synchronization*/  
__no_operation();  
/* Read port pins */  
i = PINB;  
...  
Note:  
1. For the assembly program, two temporary registers are used to minimize the time from pull-  
ups are set on pins 0, 1 and 4, until the direction bits are correctly set, defining bit 2 and 3 as  
low and redefining bits 0 and 1 as strong high drivers.  
10.2.5  
Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes  
As shown in Figure 10-2 on page 49, the digital input signal can be clamped to ground at the  
input of the schmitt-trigger. The signal denoted SLEEP in the figure, is set by the MCU Sleep  
Controller in Power-down mode, Power-save mode, and Standby mode to avoid high power  
consumption if some input signals are left floating, or have an analog signal level close to VCC/2.  
SLEEP is overridden for port pins enabled as external interrupt pins. If the external interrupt  
request is not enabled, SLEEP is active also for these pins. SLEEP is also overridden by various  
other alternate functions as described in “Alternate Port Functions” on page 53.  
If a logic high level (“one”) is present on an asynchronous external interrupt pin configured as  
“Interrupt on Rising Edge, Falling Edge, or Any Logic Change on Pin” while the external interrupt  
is not enabled, the corresponding External Interrupt Flag will be set when resuming from the  
52  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
above mentioned Sleep mode, as the clamping in these sleep mode produces the requested  
logic change.  
10.2.6  
Unconnected Pins  
If some pins are unused, it is recommended to ensure that these pins have a defined level. Even  
though most of the digital inputs are disabled in the deep sleep modes as described above, float-  
ing inputs should be avoided to reduce current consumption in all other modes where the digital  
inputs are enabled (Reset, Active mode and Idle mode).  
The simplest method to ensure a defined level of an unused pin, is to enable the internal pull-up.  
In this case, the pull-up will be disabled during reset. If low power consumption during reset is  
important, it is recommended to use an external pull-up or pull-down. Connecting unused pins  
directly to VCC or GND is not recommended, since this may cause excessive currents if the pin is  
accidentally configured as an output.  
10.3 Alternate Port Functions  
Most port pins have alternate functions in addition to being general digital I/Os. Figure 10-5  
shows how port pin control signals from the simplified Figure 10-2 on page 49 can be overridden  
by alternate functions.  
Figure 10-5. Alternate Port Functions  
PUOExn  
PUOVxn  
1
PUD  
0
DDOExn  
DDOVxn  
1
Q
D
0
DDxn  
Q CLR  
WDx  
RDx  
PVOExn  
PVOVxn  
RESET  
1
0
1
0
Pxn  
Q
D
PORTxn  
PTOExn  
Q CLR  
DIEOExn  
DIEOVxn  
SLEEP  
WPx  
RESET  
WRx  
1
0
RRx  
SYNCHRONIZER  
RPx  
SET  
D
L
Q
Q
D
Q
PINxn  
CLR Q  
CLR  
clk I/O  
DIxn  
AIOxn  
PUOExn: Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE ENABLE  
PUOVxn: Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE VALUE  
DDOExn: Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE ENABLE  
DDOVxn: Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE VALUE  
PVOExn: Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE ENABLE  
PVOVxn: Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE VALUE  
PUD:  
WDx:  
RDx:  
RRx:  
WRx:  
RPx:  
WPx:  
PULLUP DISABLE  
WRITE DDRx  
READ DDRx  
READ PORTx REGISTER  
WRITE PORTx  
READ PORTx PIN  
WRITE PINx  
DIEOExn: Pxn DIGITAL INPUT-ENABLE OVERRIDE ENABLE  
DIEOVxn: Pxn DIGITAL INPUT-ENABLE OVERRIDE VALUE  
clkI/O:  
I/O CLOCK  
SLEEP:  
SLEEP CONTROL  
DIxn:  
DIGITAL INPUT PIN n ON PORTx  
AIOxn:  
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT PIN n ON PORTx  
PTOExn: Pxn, PORT TOGGLE OVERRIDE ENABLE  
Note:  
WRx, WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clkI/O, SLEEP,  
and PUD are common to all ports. All other signals are unique for each pin.  
53  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
The overriding signals may not be present in all port pins, but Figure 10-5 serves as a generic  
description applicable to all port pins in the AVR microcontroller family.  
Table 10-2 on page 54 summarizes the function of the overriding signals. The pin and port  
indexes from Figure 10-5 on page 53 are not shown in the succeeding tables. The overriding  
signals are generated internally in the modules having the alternate function.  
Table 10-2. Generic Description of Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions  
Signal Name  
Full Name  
Description  
If this signal is set, the pull-up enable is controlled by the  
PUOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the pull-up is enabled  
when {DDxn, PORTxn, PUD} = 0b010.  
Pull-up  
Override Enable  
PUOE  
If PUOE is set, the pull-up is enabled/disabled when PUOV  
is set/cleared, regardless of the setting of the DDxn,  
PORTxn, and PUD Register bits.  
Pull-up  
Override Value  
PUOV  
DDOE  
DDOV  
If this signal is set, the Output Driver Enable is controlled by  
the DDOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the Output driver  
is enabled by the DDxn Register bit.  
Data Direction  
Override Enable  
If DDOE is set, the Output Driver is enabled/disabled when  
DDOV is set/cleared, regardless of the setting of the DDxn  
Register bit.  
Data Direction  
Override Value  
If this signal is set and the Output Driver is enabled, the port  
value is controlled by the PVOV signal. If PVOE is cleared,  
and the Output Driver is enabled, the port Value is  
controlled by the PORTxn Register bit.  
Port Value  
Override Enable  
PVOE  
Port Value  
Override Value  
If PVOE is set, the port value is set to PVOV, regardless of  
the setting of the PORTxn Register bit.  
PVOV  
PTOE  
Port Toggle  
Override Enable  
If PTOE is set, the PORTxn Register bit is inverted.  
If this bit is set, the Digital Input Enable is controlled by the  
DIEOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the Digital Input  
Enable is determined by MCU state (Normal mode, sleep  
mode).  
Digital Input Enable  
Override Enable  
DIEOE  
DIEOV  
If DIEOE is set, the Digital Input is enabled/disabled when  
DIEOV is set/cleared, regardless of the MCU state (Normal  
mode, sleep mode).  
Digital Input Enable  
Override Value  
This is the Digital Input to alternate functions. In the figure,  
the signal is connected to the output of the schmitt-trigger  
but before the synchronizer. Unless the Digital Input is used  
as a clock source, the module with the alternate function  
will use its own synchronizer.  
DI  
Digital Input  
This is the Analog Input/Output to/from alternate functions.  
The signal is connected directly to the pad, and can be  
used bi-directionally.  
AIO  
Analog Input/Output  
The following subsections shortly describe the alternate functions for each port, and relate the  
overriding signals to the alternate function. Refer to the alternate function description for further  
details.  
10.3.1  
54  
Alternate Functions of Port B  
The Port B pins with alternate function are shown in Table 10-3 on page 55.  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Table 10-3. Port B Pins Alternate Functions  
Port Pin  
Alternate Function  
RESET: Reset Pin  
dW:  
debugWIRE I/O  
PB5  
ADC0: ADC Input Channel 0  
PCINT5: Pin Change Interrupt, Source 5  
ADC2: ADC Input Channel 2  
PB4  
PB3  
PCINT4: Pin Change Interrupt 0, Source 4  
CLKI:  
External Clock Input  
ADC3: ADC Input Channel 3  
PCINT3: Pin Change Interrupt 0, Source 3  
SCK:  
Serial Clock Input  
ADC1: ADC Input Channel 1  
PB2  
PB1  
PB0  
T0:  
Timer/Counter0 Clock Source.  
PCINT2: Pin Change Interrupt 0, Source 2  
MISO: SPI Master Data Input / Slave Data Output  
AIN1:  
OC0B: Timer/Counter0 Compare Match B Output  
INT0: External Interrupt 0 Input  
Analog Comparator, Negative Input  
PCINT1:Pin Change Interrupt 0, Source 1  
MOSI:: SPI Master Data Output / Slave Data Input  
AIN0:  
Analog Comparator, Positive Input  
OC0A: Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A output  
PCINT0: Pin Change Interrupt 0, Source 0  
Table 10-4 and Table 10-5 relate the alternate functions of Port B to the overriding signals  
shown in Figure 10-5 on page 53.  
Table 10-4. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB5:PB3  
Signal  
PUOE  
PUOV  
DDOE  
DDOV  
PVOE  
PVOV  
PTOE  
PB5/RESET/ADC0/PCINT5  
PB4/ADC2/PCINT4  
PB3/ADC3/CLKI/PCINT3  
RSTDISBL(1) • DWEN(1)  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
RSTDISBL(1) • DWEN(1)  
debugWire Transmit  
0
0
0
RSTDISBL(1) + (PCINT5 •  
PCIE + ADC0D)  
DIEOE  
PCINT4 • PCIE + ADC2D  
PCINT3 • PCIE + ADC3D  
DIEOV  
DI  
ADC0D  
ADC2D  
ADC3D  
PCINT5 Input  
PCINT4 Input  
ADC2 Input  
PCINT3 Input  
ADC3 Input  
AIO  
RESET Input, ADC0 Input  
Note:  
1. 1 when the fuse is “0” (Programmed).  
55  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Table 10-5. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB2:PB0  
Signal  
Name  
PB2/SCK/ADC1/  
T0/PCINT2  
PB1/MISO/AIN1/  
OC0B/INT0/PCINT1  
PB0/MOSI/AIN0/  
AREF/OC0A/PCINT0  
PUOE  
PUOV  
DDOE  
DDOV  
PVOE  
PVOV  
PTOE  
DIEOE  
DIEOV  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
OC0B Enable  
OC0A Enable  
0
OC0B  
OC0A  
0
0
0
PCINT2 • PCIE + ADC1D  
ADC1D  
PCINT1 • PCIE + AIN1D  
AIN1D  
PCINT0 • PCIE + AIN0D  
AIN0D  
T0/INT0/  
PCINT2 Input  
DI  
PCINT1 Input  
PCINT0 Input  
Analog Comparator  
Negative Input  
Analog Comparator Positive  
Input  
AIO  
ADC1 Input  
10.4 Register Description  
10.4.1  
MCUCR – MCU Control Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
SE  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
1
ISC01  
R/W  
0
0
ISC00  
R/W  
0
PUD  
R/W  
0
SM1  
R/W  
0
SM0  
R/W  
0
MCUCR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7, 2– Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 6 – PUD: Pull-up Disable  
When this bit is written to one, the pull-ups in the I/O ports are disabled even if the DDxn and  
PORTxn Registers are configured to enable the pull-ups ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01). See “Con-  
figuring the Pin” on page 49 for more details about this feature.  
10.4.2  
10.4.3  
PORTB – Port B Data Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
PORTB5  
R/W  
0
4
PORTB4  
R/W  
0
3
PORTB3  
R/W  
0
2
PORTB2  
R/W  
0
1
PORTB1  
R/W  
0
0
PORTB0  
R/W  
0
R
0
PORTB  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
DDRB – Port B Data Direction Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
DDB5  
R/W  
0
4
DDB4  
R/W  
0
3
DDB3  
R/W  
0
2
DDB2  
R/W  
0
1
DDB1  
R/W  
0
0
DDB0  
R/W  
0
DDRB  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
56  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
10.4.4  
PINB – Port B Input Pins Address  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PINB5  
R/W  
N/A  
PINB4  
R/W  
N/A  
PINB3  
R/W  
N/A  
PINB2  
R/W  
N/A  
PINB1  
R/W  
N/A  
PINB0  
R/W  
PINB  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
N/A  
57  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
11. 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM  
11.1 Features  
Two Independent Output Compare Units  
Double Buffered Output Compare Registers  
Clear Timer on Compare Match (Auto Reload)  
Glitch Free, Phase Correct Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)  
Variable PWM Period  
Frequency Generator  
Three Independent Interrupt Sources (TOV0, OCF0A, and OCF0B)  
11.2 Overview  
Timer/Counter0 is a general purpose 8-bit Timer/Counter module, with two independent Output  
Compare Units, and with PWM support. It allows accurate program execution timing (event man-  
agement) and wave generation.  
A simplified block diagram of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 11-1 on page 58. For  
the actual placement of I/O pins, refer to “Pinout ATtiny13/ATtiny13V” on page 2. CPU accessi-  
ble I/O Registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O  
Register and bit locations are listed in the “Register Description” on page 69.  
Figure 11-1. 8-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram  
Count  
TOVn  
(Int.Req.)  
Clear  
Control Logic  
Clock Select  
Direction  
clkTn  
Edge  
Detector  
Tn  
TOP  
BOTTOM  
( From Prescaler )  
Timer/Counter  
TCNTn  
=
= 0  
OCnA  
(Int.Req.)  
Waveform  
Generation  
OCnA  
OCnB  
=
OCRnA  
Fixed  
TOP  
Value  
OCnB  
(Int.Req.)  
Waveform  
Generation  
=
OCRnB  
TCCRnA  
TCCRnB  
58  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
11.2.1  
Registers  
The Timer/Counter (TCNT0) and Output Compare Registers (OCR0A and OCR0B) are 8-bit  
registers. Interrupt request (abbreviated to Int.Req. in the figure) signals are all visible in the  
Timer Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR0). All interrupts are individually masked with the Timer Inter-  
rupt Mask Register (TIMSK0). TIFR0 and TIMSK0 are not shown in the figure.  
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or by an external clock source on  
the T0 pin. The Clock Select logic block controls which clock source and edge the Timer/Counter  
uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source  
is selected. The output from the Clock Select logic is referred to as the timer clock (clkT0).  
The double buffered Output Compare Registers (OCR0A and OCR0B) is compared with the  
Timer/Counter value at all times. The result of the compare can be used by the Waveform Gen-  
erator to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output Compare pins (OC0A and  
OC0B). See “Output Compare Unit” on page 60. for details. The Compare Match event will also  
set the Compare Flag (OCF0A or OCF0B) which can be used to generate an Output Compare  
interrupt request.  
11.2.2  
Definitions  
Many register and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “n”  
replaces the Timer/Counter number, in this case 0. A lower case “x” replaces the Output Com-  
pare Unit, in this case Compare Unit A or Compare Unit B. However, when using the register or  
bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used, i.e., TCNT0 for accessing  
Timer/Counter0 counter value and so on.  
The definitions in Table 11-1 on page 59 are also used extensively throughout the document.  
Table 11-1. Definitions  
BOTTOM  
MAX  
The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes 0x00.  
The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255).  
TOP  
The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the  
count sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF  
(MAX) or the value stored in the OCR0A Register. The assignment is depen-  
dent on the mode of operation.  
11.3 Timer/Counter Clock Sources  
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal or an external clock source. The clock source  
is selected by the Clock Select logic which is controlled by the Clock Select (CS02:0) bits  
located in the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR0B). For details on clock sources and pres-  
caler, see “Timer/Counter Prescaler” on page 76.  
11.4 Counter Unit  
The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter unit. Figure  
11-2 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surroundings.  
59  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Figure 11-2. Counter Unit Block Diagram  
TOVn  
(Int.Req.)  
DATA BUS  
Clock Select  
count  
Edge  
Detector  
Tn  
clkTn  
clear  
TCNTn  
Control Logic  
direction  
( From Prescaler )  
bottom  
top  
Signal description (internal signals):  
count  
direction  
clear  
Increment or decrement TCNT0 by 1.  
Select between increment and decrement.  
Clear TCNT0 (set all bits to zero).  
clkTn  
top  
bottom  
Timer/Counter clock, referred to as clkT0 in the following.  
Signalize that TCNT0 has reached maximum value.  
Signalize that TCNT0 has reached minimum value (zero).  
Depending of the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented  
at each timer clock (clkT0). clkT0 can be generated from an external or internal clock source,  
selected by the Clock Select bits (CS02:0). When no clock source is selected (CS02:0 = 0) the  
timer is stopped. However, the TCNT0 value can be accessed by the CPU, regardless of  
whether clkT0 is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or  
count operations.  
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM01 and WGM00 bits located in  
the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR0A) and the WGM02 bit located in the Timer/Counter  
Control Register B (TCCR0B). There are close connections between how the counter behaves  
(counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output Compare output OC0A. For more  
details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see “Modes of Opera-  
tion” on page 63.  
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set according to the mode of operation selected by  
the WGM01:0 bits. TOV0 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt.  
11.5 Output Compare Unit  
The 8-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT0 with the Output Compare Registers  
(OCR0A and OCR0B). Whenever TCNT0 equals OCR0A or OCR0B, the comparator signals a  
match. A match will set the Output Compare Flag (OCF0A or OCF0B) at the next timer clock  
cycle. If the corresponding interrupt is enabled, the Output Compare Flag generates an Output  
Compare interrupt. The Output Compare Flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is exe-  
cuted. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical one to its I/O bit  
location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output according to  
operating mode set by the WGM02:0 bits and Compare Output mode (COM0x1:0) bits. The max  
and bottom signals are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the special cases of the  
extreme values in some modes of operation (See “Modes of Operation” on page 63.).  
Figure 11-3 on page 61 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit.  
60  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 11-3. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram  
DATA BUS  
OCRnx  
TCNTn  
= (8-bit Comparator )  
OCFnx (Int.Req.)  
top  
bottom  
Waveform Generator  
OCnx  
FOCn  
WGMn1:0  
COMnX1:0  
The OCR0x Registers are double buffered when using any of the Pulse Width Modulation  
(PWM) modes. For the normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of operation, the dou-  
ble buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the update of the OCR0x Compare  
Registers to either top or bottom of the counting sequence. The synchronization prevents the  
occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the output glitch-free.  
The OCR0x Register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering  
is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCR0x Buffer Register, and if double buffering is dis-  
abled the CPU will access the OCR0x directly.  
11.5.1  
Force Output Compare  
In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by  
writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOC0x) bit. Forcing Compare Match will not set the  
OCF0x Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC0x pin will be updated as if a real Compare  
Match had occurred (the COM0x1:0 bits settings define whether the OC0x pin is set, cleared or  
toggled).  
11.5.2  
11.5.3  
Compare Match Blocking by TCNT0 Write  
All CPU write operations to the TCNT0 Register will block any Compare Match that occur in the  
next timer clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR0x to be initial-  
ized to the same value as TCNT0 without triggering an interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is  
enabled.  
Using the Output Compare Unit  
Since writing TCNT0 in any mode of operation will block all Compare Matches for one timer  
clock cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNT0 when using the Output Compare  
Unit, independently of whether the Timer/Counter is running or not. If the value written to TCNT0  
equals the OCR0x value, the Compare Match will be missed, resulting in incorrect waveform  
61  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT0 value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is  
down-counting.  
The setup of the OC0x should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the  
port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OC0x value is to use the Force Output Com-  
pare (FOC0x) strobe bits in Normal mode. The OC0x Registers keep their values even when  
changing between Waveform Generation modes.  
Be aware that the COM0x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value.  
Changing the COM0x1:0 bits will take effect immediately.  
11.6 Compare Match Output Unit  
The Compare Output mode (COM0x1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator uses  
the COM0x1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OC0x) state at the next Compare Match.  
Also, the COM0x1:0 bits control the OC0x pin output source. Figure 11-4 on page 62 shows a  
simplified schematic of the logic affected by the COM0x1:0 bit setting. The I/O Registers, I/O  
bits, and I/O pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O Port Control  
Registers (DDR and PORT) that are affected by the COM0x1:0 bits are shown. When referring  
to the OC0x state, the reference is for the internal OC0x Register, not the OC0x pin. If a system  
reset occur, the OC0x Register is reset to “0”.  
Figure 11-4. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic  
COMnx1  
Waveform  
Generator  
COMnx0  
FOCn  
D
Q
1
0
OCn  
Pin  
OCnx  
D
Q
PORT  
D
Q
DDR  
clkI/O  
The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC0x) from the Waveform  
Generator if either of the COM0x1:0 bits are set. However, the OC0x pin direction (input or out-  
put) is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data Direction  
Register bit for the OC0x pin (DDR_OC0x) must be set as output before the OC0x value is visi-  
ble on the pin. The port override function is independent of the Waveform Generation mode.  
62  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC0x state before the out-  
put is enabled. Note that some COM0x1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of  
operation. See “Register Description” on page 69.  
11.6.1  
Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation  
The Waveform Generator uses the COM0x1:0 bits differently in Normal, CTC, and PWM modes.  
For all modes, setting the COM0x1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action on the  
OC0x Register is to be performed on the next Compare Match. For compare output actions in  
the non-PWM modes refer to Table 11-2 on page 69. For fast PWM mode, refer to Table 11-3 on  
page 70, and for phase correct PWM refer to Table 11-4 on page 70.  
A change of the COM0x1:0 bits state will have effect at the first Compare Match after the bits are  
written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the  
FOC0x strobe bits.  
11.7 Modes of Operation  
The mode of operation, i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins, is  
defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGM02:0) and Compare Output  
mode (COM0x1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting sequence,  
while the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The COM0x1:0 bits control whether the PWM out-  
put generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes  
the COM0x1:0 bits control whether the output should be set, cleared, or toggled at a Compare  
Match (See “Compare Match Output Unit” on page 62.).  
For detailed timing information refer to Figure 11-8 on page 68, Figure 11-9 on page 68, Figure  
11-10 on page 68 and Figure 11-11 on page 69 in “Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams” on page  
67.  
11.7.1  
Normal Mode  
The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM02:0 = 0). In this mode the counting  
direction is always up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply  
overruns when it passes its maximum 8-bit value (TOP = 0xFF) and then restarts from the bot-  
tom (0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) will be set in the same  
timer clock cycle as the TCNT0 becomes zero. The TOV0 Flag in this case behaves like a ninth  
bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow interrupt  
that automatically clears the TOV0 Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by software.  
There are no special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can be written  
anytime.  
The Output Compare Unit can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the Out-  
put Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will  
occupy too much of the CPU time.  
11.7.2  
Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode  
In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGM02:0 = 2), the OCR0A Register is used to  
manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter  
value (TCNT0) matches the OCR0A. The OCR0A defines the top value for the counter, hence  
also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the Compare Match output frequency. It  
also simplifies the operation of counting external events.  
63  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 11-5 on page 64. The counter value  
(TCNT0) increases until a Compare Match occurs between TCNT0 and OCR0A, and then coun-  
ter (TCNT0) is cleared.  
Figure 11-5. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram  
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set  
TCNTn  
OCn  
(Toggle)  
(COMnx1:0 = 1)  
1
2
3
4
Period  
An interrupt can be generated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by using the  
OCF0A Flag. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating  
the TOP value. However, changing TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is run-  
ning with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does not  
have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR0A is lower than the current  
value of TCNT0, the counter will miss the Compare Match. The counter will then have to count to  
its maximum value (0xFF) and wrap around starting at 0x00 before the Compare Match can  
occur.  
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC0A output can be set to toggle its logical  
level on each Compare Match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode  
(COM0A1:0 = 1). The OC0A value will not be visible on the port pin unless the data direction for  
the pin is set to output. The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC0  
clk_I/O/2 when OCR0A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform frequency is defined by the following  
equation:  
=
f
f
clk_I/O  
f
= --------------------------------------------------  
OCnx  
2 N ⋅ (1 + OCRnx)  
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).  
As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOV0 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the  
counter counts from MAX to 0x00.  
11.7.3  
Fast PWM Mode  
The fast Pulse Width Modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM02:0 = 3 or 7) provides a high fre-  
quency PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM option by  
its single-slope operation. The counter counts from BOTTOM to TOP then restarts from BOT-  
TOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR0A when WGM2:0 = 7. In non-  
inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC0x) is cleared on the Compare Match  
between TCNT0 and OCR0x, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting Compare Output mode, the out-  
put is set on Compare Match and cleared at BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the  
operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the phase correct PWM  
mode that use dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited  
64  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
for power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High frequency allows physically small  
sized external components (coils, capacitors), and therefore reduces total system cost.  
In fast PWM mode, the counter is incremented until the counter value matches the TOP value.  
The counter is then cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast  
PWM mode is shown in Figure 11-6 on page 65. The TCNT0 value is in the timing diagram  
shown as a histogram for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram includes non-  
inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes repre-  
sent Compare Matches between OCR0x and TCNT0.  
Figure 11-6. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram  
OCRnx Interrupt Flag Set  
OCRnx Update and  
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set  
TCNTn  
(COMnx1:0 = 2)  
(COMnx1:0 = 3)  
OCn  
OCn  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Period  
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. If the inter-  
rupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the compare value.  
In fast PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC0x pins.  
Setting the COM0x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output  
can be generated by setting the COM0x1:0 to three: Setting the COM0A1:0 bits to one allows  
the AC0A pin to toggle on Compare Matches if the WGM02 bit is set. This option is not available  
for the OC0B pin (See Table 11-3 on page 70). The actual OC0x value will only be visible on the  
port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is generated by  
setting (or clearing) the OC0x Register at the Compare Match between OCR0x and TCNT0, and  
clearing (or setting) the OC0x Register at the timer clock cycle the counter is cleared (changes  
from TOP to BOTTOM).  
The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation:  
f
clk_I/O  
f
= ------------------  
OCnxPWM  
N 256  
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).  
The extreme values for the OCR0A Register represents special cases when generating a PWM  
waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will  
be a narrow spike for each MAX+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR0A equal to MAX will result  
65  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
in a constantly high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by the COM0A1:0  
bits.)  
A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by set-  
ting OC0x to toggle its logical level on each Compare Match (COM0x1:0 = 1). The waveform  
generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC0 = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR0A is set to zero. This  
feature is similar to the OC0A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the Out-  
put Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode.  
11.7.4  
Phase Correct PWM Mode  
The phase correct PWM mode (WGM02:0 = 1 or 5) provides a high resolution phase correct  
PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct PWM mode is based on a dual-slope  
operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM to TOP and then from TOP to BOT-  
TOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 1, and OCR0A when WGM2:0 = 5. In non-  
inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC0x) is cleared on the Compare Match  
between TCNT0 and OCR0x while upcounting, and set on the Compare Match while down-  
counting. In inverting Output Compare mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation  
has lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to the sym-  
metric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control  
applications.  
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches TOP.  
When the counter reaches TOP, it changes the count direction. The TCNT0 value will be equal  
to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown  
on Figure 11-7 on page 66. The TCNT0 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for  
illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM out-  
puts. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes represent Compare Matches  
between OCR0x and TCNT0.  
Figure 11-7. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram  
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set  
OCRnx Update  
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set  
TCNTn  
(COMnx1:0 = 2)  
OCn  
(COMnx1:0 = 3)  
OCn  
1
2
3
Period  
66  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. The  
Interrupt Flag can be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the BOTTOM  
value.  
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the  
OC0x pins. Setting the COM0x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM. An inverted  
PWM output can be generated by setting the COM0x1:0 to three: Setting the COM0A0 bits to  
one allows the OC0A pin to toggle on Compare Matches if the WGM02 bit is set. This option is  
not available for the OC0B pin (See Table 11-4 on page 70). The actual OC0x value will only be  
visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is  
generated by clearing (or setting) the OC0x Register at the Compare Match between OCR0x  
and TCNT0 when the counter increments, and setting (or clearing) the OC0x Register at Com-  
pare Match between OCR0x and TCNT0 when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for  
the output when using phase correct PWM can be calculated by the following equation:  
f
clk_I/O  
f
= ------------------  
OCnxPCPWM  
N 510  
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).  
The extreme values for the OCR0A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM  
waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the  
output will be continuously low and if set equal to MAX the output will be continuously high for  
non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values.  
At the very start of period 2 in Figure 11-7 on page 66 OCn has a transition from high to low  
even though there is no Compare Match. The point of this transition is to guarantee symmetry  
around BOTTOM. There are two cases that give a transition without Compare Match.  
• OCR0A changes its value from MAX, like in Figure 11-7 on page 66. When the OCR0A value  
is MAX the OCn pin value is the same as the result of a down-counting Compare Match. To  
ensure symmetry around BOTTOM the OCn value at MAX must correspond to the result of  
an up-counting Compare Match.  
• The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCR0A, and for that reason  
misses the Compare Match and hence the OCn change that would have happened on the  
way up.  
11.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams  
The Timer/Counter is a synchronous design and the timer clock (clkT0) is therefore shown as a  
clock enable signal in the following figures. The figures include information on when Interrupt  
Flags are set. Figure 11-8 on page 68 contains timing data for basic Timer/Counter operation.  
The figure shows the count sequence close to the MAX value in all modes other than phase cor-  
rect PWM mode.  
67  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Figure 11-8. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling  
clkI/O  
clkTn  
(clkI/O/1)  
TCNTn  
TOVn  
MAX - 1  
MAX  
BOTTOM  
BOTTOM + 1  
Figure 11-9 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.  
Figure 11-9. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)  
clkI/O  
clkTn  
(clkI/O/8)  
TCNTn  
TOVn  
MAX - 1  
MAX  
BOTTOM  
BOTTOM + 1  
Figure 11-10 shows the setting of OCF0B in all modes and OCF0A in all modes except CTC  
mode and PWM mode, where OCR0A is TOP.  
Figure 11-10. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF0x, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)  
clkI/O  
clkTn  
(clkI/O/8)  
TCNTn  
OCRnx  
OCFnx  
OCRnx - 1  
OCRnx  
OCRnx + 1  
OCRnx + 2  
OCRnx Value  
Figure 11-11 on page 69 shows the setting of OCF0A and the clearing of TCNT0 in CTC mode  
and fast PWM mode where OCR0A is TOP.  
68  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 11-11. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Clear Timer on Compare Match mode, with Pres-  
caler (fclk_I/O/8)  
clkI/O  
clkTn  
(clkI/O/8)  
TCNTn  
(CTC)  
TOP - 1  
TOP  
BOTTOM  
BOTTOM + 1  
OCRnx  
TOP  
OCFnx  
11.9 Register Description  
11.9.1  
TCCR0A – Timer/Counter Control Register A  
Bit  
7
COM0A1  
R/W  
6
COM0A0  
R/W  
5
COM0B1  
R/W  
4
COM0B0  
R/W  
3
2
1
0
R
0
WGM01  
R/W  
0
WGM00  
R/W  
0
TCCR0A  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
0
0
0
0
• Bits 7:6 – COM01A:0: Compare Match Output A Mode  
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC0A) behavior. If one or both of the COM0A1:0  
bits are set, the OC0A output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected  
to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC0A pin  
must be set in order to enable the output driver.  
When OC0A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM0A1:0 bits depends on the  
WGM02:0 bit setting.  
Table 11-2 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to a normal or  
CTC mode (non-PWM).  
Table 11-2. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode  
COM01  
COM00  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.  
Toggle OC0A on Compare Match  
Clear OC0A on Compare Match  
Set OC0A on Compare Match  
Table 11-3 on page 70 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM01:0 bits are set to  
fast PWM mode.  
69  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Table 11-3. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1)  
COM01  
COM00  
Description  
0
0
Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.  
WGM02 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC0A Disconnected.  
WGM02 = 1: Toggle OC0A on Compare Match.  
0
1
1
1
0
1
Clear OC0A on Compare Match, set OC0A at TOP  
Set OC0A on Compare Match, clear OC0A at TOP  
Note:  
1. A special case occurs when OCR0A equals TOP and COM0A1 is set. In this case, the Com-  
pare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Fast PWM Mode” on page 64  
for more details.  
Table 11-4 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to phase cor-  
rect PWM mode.  
Table 11-4. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1)  
COM0A1  
COM0A0  
Description  
0
0
Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.  
WGM02 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC0A Disconnected.  
WGM02 = 1: Toggle OC0A on Compare Match.  
0
1
1
1
0
1
Clear OC0A on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC0A on  
Compare Match when down-counting.  
Set OC0A on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC0A on  
Compare Match when down-counting.  
Note:  
1. A special case occurs when OCR0A equals TOP and COM0A1 is set. In this case, the Com-  
pare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on  
page 66 for more details.  
• Bits 5:4 – COM0B1:0: Compare Match Output B Mode  
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC0B) behavior. If one or both of the COM0B1:0  
bits are set, the OC0B output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected  
to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC0B pin  
must be set in order to enable the output driver.  
When OC0B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM0B1:0 bits depends on the  
WGM02:0 bit setting.  
Table 11-5 on page 71 shows the COM0B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to  
a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).  
70  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Table 11-5. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode  
COM01  
COM00  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected.  
Toggle OC0B on Compare Match  
Clear OC0B on Compare Match  
Set OC0B on Compare Match  
Table 11-6 shows the COM0B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to fast PWM  
mode.  
Table 11-6. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1)  
COM01  
COM00  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected.  
Reserved  
Clear OC0B on Compare Match, set OC0B at TOP  
Set OC0B on Compare Match, clear OC0B at TOP  
Note:  
1. A special case occurs when OCR0B equals TOP and COM0B1 is set. In this case, the Com-  
pare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Fast PWM Mode” on page 64  
for more details.  
Table 11-7 shows the COM0B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to phase cor-  
rect PWM mode.  
Table 11-7. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1)  
COM0A1  
COM0A0  
Description  
0
0
0
1
Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected.  
Reserved  
Clear OC0B on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC0B on  
Compare Match when down-counting.  
1
1
0
1
Set OC0B on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC0B on  
Compare Match when down-counting.  
Note:  
1. A special case occurs when OCR0B equals TOP and COM0B1 is set. In this case, the Com-  
pare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on  
page 66 for more details.  
• Bits 3, 2 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13 and will always read as zero.  
71  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
• Bits 1:0 – WGM01:0: Waveform Generation Mode  
Combined with the WGM02 bit found in the TCCR0B Register, these bits control the counting  
sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of wave-  
form generation to be used, see Table 11-8 on page 72. Modes of operation supported by the  
Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) mode,  
and two types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes (see “Modes of Operation” on page 63).  
Table 11-8. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description  
Timer/Counter  
Mode of  
Operation  
Update of  
OCRx at  
TOV Flag  
Mode  
WGM2  
WGM1  
WGM0  
TOP  
Set on(1)(2)  
0
0
0
0
Normal  
0xFF  
Immediate  
TOP  
MAX  
PWM  
(Phase Correct)  
1
0
0
1
0xFF  
BOTTOM  
2
3
4
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
CTC  
OCRA  
0xFF  
Immediate  
MAX  
MAX  
Fast PWM  
Reserved  
TOP  
PWM  
(Phase Correct)  
5
1
0
1
OCRA  
TOP  
BOTTOM  
6
7
1
1
1
1
0
1
Reserved  
Fast PWM  
OCRA  
TOP  
TOP  
Notes: 1. MAX  
= 0xFF  
2. BOTTOM = 0x00  
11.9.2  
TCCR0B – Timer/Counter Control Register B  
Bit  
7
FOC0A  
W
6
FOC0B  
W
5
4
3
2
CS02  
R/W  
0
1
CS01  
R/W  
0
0
CS00  
R/W  
0
R
0
WGM02  
R/W  
0
TCCR0B  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
0
0
• Bit 7 – FOC0A: Force Output Compare A  
The FOC0A bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.  
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when  
TCCR0B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0A bit,  
an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC0A output is  
changed according to its COM0A1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC0A bit is implemented as a  
strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM0A1:0 bits that determines the effect of the  
forced compare.  
A FOC0A strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using  
OCR0A as TOP.  
The FOC0A bit is always read as zero.  
72  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
• Bit 6 – FOC0B: Force Output Compare B  
The FOC0B bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.  
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when  
TCCR0B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0B bit,  
an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC0B output is  
changed according to its COM0B1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC0B bit is implemented as a  
strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM0B1:0 bits that determines the effect of the  
forced compare.  
A FOC0B strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using  
OCR0B as TOP.  
The FOC0B bit is always read as zero.  
• Bits 5:4 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 3 – WGM02: Waveform Generation Mode  
See the description in the “TCCR0A – Timer/Counter Control Register A” on page 69.  
• Bits 2:0 – CS02:0: Clock Select  
The three Clock Select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter.  
Table 11-9. Clock Select Bit Description  
CS02  
CS01  
CS00  
Description  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped)  
clkI/O/(No prescaling)  
clkI/O/8 (From prescaler)  
clkI/O/64 (From prescaler)  
clkI/O/256 (From prescaler)  
clkI/O/1024 (From prescaler)  
External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on falling edge.  
External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on rising edge.  
If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter0, transitions on the T0 pin will clock the  
counter even if the pin is configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the  
counting.  
11.9.3  
TCNT0 – Timer/Counter Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TCNT0[7:0]  
TCNT0  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
0
The Timer/Counter Register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to the  
Timer/Counter unit 8-bit counter. Writing to the TCNT0 Register blocks (removes) the Compare  
Match on the following timer clock. Modifying the counter (TCNT0) while the counter is running,  
introduces a risk of missing a Compare Match between TCNT0 and the OCR0x Registers.  
73  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
11.9.4  
11.9.5  
11.9.6  
OCR0A – Output Compare Register A  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OCR0A[7:0]  
OCR0A  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The Output Compare Register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the  
counter value (TCNT0). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to  
generate a waveform output on the OC0A pin.  
OCR0B – Output Compare Register B  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OCR0B[7:0]  
OCR0B  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
0
The Output Compare Register B contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the  
counter value (TCNT0). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to  
generate a waveform output on the OC0B pin.  
TIMSK0 – Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
OCIE0B  
R/W  
0
2
OCIE0A  
R/W  
0
1
TOIE0  
R/W  
0
0
TIMSK0  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:4, 0 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 3 – OCIE0B: Timer/Counter Output Compare Match B Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE0B bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the  
Timer/Counter Compare Match B interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if  
a Compare Match in Timer/Counter occurs, i.e., when the OCF0B bit is set in the Timer/Counter  
Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR0.  
• Bit 2 – OCIE0A: Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE0A bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the  
Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed  
if a Compare Match in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the OCF0A bit is set in the  
Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR0.  
• Bit 1 – TOIE0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable  
When the TOIE0 bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the  
Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if an  
overflow in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the TOV0 bit is set in the Timer/Counter 0 Inter-  
rupt Flag Register – TIFR0.  
74  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
11.9.7  
TIFR0 – Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt Flag Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
OCF0B  
R/W  
0
2
OCF0A  
R/W  
0
1
TOV0  
R/W  
0
0
R
0
TIFR0  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:4, 0 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 3 – OCF0B: Output Compare Flag 0 B  
The OCF0B bit is set when a Compare Match occurs between the Timer/Counter and the data in  
OCR0B – Output Compare Register0 B. OCF0B is cleared by hardware when executing the cor-  
responding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF0B is cleared by writing a logic one to  
the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0B (Timer/Counter Compare B Match Interrupt Enable),  
and OCF0B are set, the Timer/Counter Compare Match Interrupt is executed.  
• Bit 2 – OCF0A: Output Compare Flag 0 A  
The OCF0A bit is set when a Compare Match occurs between the Timer/Counter0 and the data  
in OCR0A – Output Compare Register0. OCF0A is cleared by hardware when executing the cor-  
responding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF0A is cleared by writing a logic one to  
the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0A (Timer/Counter0 Compare Match Interrupt Enable),  
and OCF0A are set, the Timer/Counter0 Compare Match Interrupt is executed.  
• Bit 1 – TOV0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Flag  
The bit TOV0 is set when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter0. TOV0 is cleared by hardware  
when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV0 is cleared by  
writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG I-bit, TOIE0 (Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt  
Enable), and TOV0 are set, the Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is executed.  
The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGM02:0 bit setting. Refer to Table 11-8, “Waveform  
Generation Mode Bit Description” on page 72.  
75  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
12. Timer/Counter Prescaler  
12.1 Overview  
The Timer/Counter can be clocked directly by the system clock (by setting the CSn2:0 = 1). This  
provides the fastest operation, with a maximum Timer/Counter clock frequency equal to system  
clock frequency (fCLK_I/O). Alternatively, one of four taps from the prescaler can be used as a  
clock source. The prescaled clock has a frequency of either fCLK_I/O/8, fCLK_I/O/64, fCLK_I/O/256, or  
fCLK_I/O/1024.  
12.2 Prescaler Reset  
The prescaler is free running, i.e., operates independently of the Clock Select logic of the  
Timer/Counter. Since the prescaler is not affected by the Timer/Counter’s clock select, the state  
of the prescaler will have implications for situations where a prescaled clock is used. One exam-  
ple of prescaling artifacts occurs when the timer is enabled and clocked by the prescaler (6 >  
CSn2:0 > 1). The number of system clock cycles from when the timer is enabled to the first count  
occurs can be from 1 to N+1 system clock cycles, where N equals the prescaler divisor (8, 64,  
256, or 1024).  
It is possible to use the Prescaler Reset for synchronizing the Timer/Counter to program  
execution.  
12.3 External Clock Source  
An external clock source applied to the T0 pin can be used as Timer/Counter clock (clkT0). The  
T0 pin is sampled once every system clock cycle by the pin synchronization logic. The synchro-  
nized (sampled) signal is then passed through the edge detector. Figure 12-1 on page 76 shows  
a functional equivalent block diagram of the T0 synchronization and edge detector logic. The  
registers are clocked at the positive edge of the internal system clock (clkI/O). The latch is trans-  
parent in the high period of the internal system clock.  
The edge detector generates one clkT0 pulse for each positive (CSn2:0 = 7) or negative (CSn2:0  
= 6) edge it detects.  
Figure 12-1. T0 Pin Sampling  
Tn_sync  
(To Clock  
Tn  
D
Q
D
Q
D
Q
Select Logic)  
LE  
clkI/O  
Synchronization  
Edge Detector  
The synchronization and edge detector logic introduces a delay of 2.5 to 3.5 system clock cycles  
from an edge has been applied to the T0 pin to the counter is updated.  
Enabling and disabling of the clock input must be done when T0 has been stable for at least one  
system clock cycle, otherwise it is a risk that a false Timer/Counter clock pulse is generated.  
Each half period of the external clock applied must be longer than one system clock cycle to  
ensure correct sampling. The external clock must be guaranteed to have less than half the sys-  
tem clock frequency (fExtClk < fclk_I/O/2) given a 50/50% duty cycle. Since the edge detector uses  
76  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
sampling, the maximum frequency of an external clock it can detect is half the sampling fre-  
quency (Nyquist sampling theorem). However, due to variation of the system clock frequency  
and duty cycle caused by Oscillator source (crystal, resonator, and capacitors) tolerances, it is  
recommended that maximum frequency of an external clock source is less than fclk_I/O/2.5.  
An external clock source can not be prescaled.  
Figure 12-2. Prescaler for Timer/Counter0  
clkI/O  
Clear  
PSR10  
T0  
Synchronization  
clkT0  
Note:  
1. The synchronization logic on the input pins (T0) is shown in Figure 12-1 on page 76.  
12.4 Register Description.  
12.4.1  
GTCCR – General Timer/Counter Control Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PSR10  
R/W  
0
TSM  
R/W  
0
GTCCR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7 – TSM: Timer/Counter Synchronization Mode  
Writing the TSM bit to one activates the Timer/Counter Synchronization mode. In this mode, the  
value that is written to the PSR10 bit is kept, hence keeping the Prescaler Reset signal asserted.  
This ensures that the Timer/Counter is halted and can be configured without the risk of advanc-  
ing during configuration. When the TSM bit is written to zero, the PSR10 bit is cleared by  
hardware, and the Timer/Counter start counting.  
• Bit 0 – PSR10: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter0  
When this bit is one, the Timer/Counter0 prescaler will be Reset. This bit is normally cleared  
immediately by hardware, except if the TSM bit is set.  
77  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
13. Analog Comparator  
The Analog Comparator compares the input values on the positive pin AIN0 and negative pin  
AIN1. When the voltage on the positive pin AIN0 is higher than the voltage on the negative pin  
AIN1, the Analog Comparator output, ACO, is set. The comparator can trigger a separate inter-  
rupt, exclusive to the Analog Comparator. The user can select Interrupt triggering on comparator  
output rise, fall or toggle. A block diagram of the comparator and its surrounding logic is shown  
in Figure 13-1 on page 78.  
Figure 13-1. Analog Comparator Block Diagram  
BANDGAP  
REFERENCE  
ACBG  
ACME  
ADEN  
ADC MULTIPLEXER  
OUTPUT(1)  
See Figure 1-1 on page 2, Table 10-5 on page 56, and Table 13-2 on page 80 for Analog Compar-  
ator pin placement.  
13.1 Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input  
It is possible to select any of the ADC3..0 pins to replace the negative input to the Analog Com-  
parator. The ADC multiplexer is used to select this input, and consequently, the ADC must be  
switched off to utilize this feature. If the Analog Comparator Multiplexer Enable bit (ACME in  
ADCSRB) is set and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is zero), MUX1:0 in ADMUX  
select the input pin to replace the negative input to the Analog Comparator, as shown in Table  
13-1. If ACME is cleared or ADEN is set, AIN1 is applied to the negative input to the Analog  
Comparator.  
Table 13-1. Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input  
ACME  
ADEN  
MUX1..0  
Analog Comparator Negative Input  
0
1
1
1
1
1
x
1
0
0
0
0
xx  
xx  
00  
01  
10  
11  
AIN1  
AIN1  
ADC0  
ADC1  
ADC2  
ADC3  
78  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
13.2 Register Description  
13.2.1  
ADCSRB – ADC Control and Status Register  
Bit  
7
6
ACME  
R/W  
0
5
4
3
2
ADTS2  
R/W  
0
1
ADTS1  
R/W  
0
0
ADTS0  
R/W  
0
ADCSRB  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 6 – ACME: Analog Comparator Multiplexer Enable  
When this bit is written logic one and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is zero), the  
ADC multiplexer selects the negative input to the Analog Comparator. When this bit is written  
logic zero, AIN1 is applied to the negative input of the Analog Comparator. For a detailed  
description of this bit, see “Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input” on page 78.  
13.2.2  
ACSR– Analog Comparator Control and Status Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
ACIE  
R/W  
0
2
1
ACIS1  
R/W  
0
0
ACIS0  
R/W  
0
ACD  
ACBG  
ACO  
ACI  
R/W  
0
ACSR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R
R
0
N/A  
• Bit 7 – ACD: Analog Comparator Disable  
When this bit is written logic one, the power to the Analog Comparator is switched off. This bit  
can be set at any time to turn off the Analog Comparator. This will reduce power consumption in  
Active and Idle mode. When changing the ACD bit, the Analog Comparator Interrupt must be  
disabled by clearing the ACIE bit in ACSR. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the bit is  
changed.  
• Bit 6 – ACBG: Analog Comparator Bandgap Select  
When this bit is set, a fixed bandgap reference voltage replaces the positive input to the Analog  
Comparator. When this bit is cleared, AIN0 is applied to the positive input of the Analog Compar-  
ator. When the bandgap reference is used as input to the Analog Comparator, it will take certain  
time for the voltage to stabilize. If not stabilized, the first value may give a wrong value.  
• Bit 5 – ACO: Analog Comparator Output  
The output of the Analog Comparator is synchronized and then directly connected to ACO. The  
synchronization introduces a delay of 1 - 2 clock cycles.  
• Bit 4 – ACI: Analog Comparator Interrupt Flag  
This bit is set by hardware when a comparator output event triggers the interrupt mode defined  
by ACIS1 and ACIS0. The Analog Comparator interrupt routine is executed if the ACIE bit is set  
and the I-bit in SREG is set. ACI is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding inter-  
rupt handling vector. Alternatively, ACI is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag.  
• Bit 3 – ACIE: Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable  
When the ACIE bit is written logic one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the Analog Com-  
parator interrupt is activated. When written logic zero, the interrupt is disabled.  
• Bit 2 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny13 and will always read as zero.  
79  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
• Bits 1, 0 – ACIS1, ACIS0: Analog Comparator Interrupt Mode Select  
These bits determine which comparator events that trigger the Analog Comparator interrupt. The  
different settings are shown in Table 13-2 on page 80.  
Table 13-2. ACIS1/ACIS0 Settings  
ACIS1  
ACIS0  
Interrupt Mode  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Comparator Interrupt on Output Toggle.  
Reserved  
Comparator Interrupt on Falling Output Edge.  
Comparator Interrupt on Rising Output Edge.  
When changing the ACIS1/ACIS0 bits, the Analog Comparator Interrupt must be disabled by  
clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the ACSR Register. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the  
bits are changed.  
13.2.3  
DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0  
Bit  
7
6
5
ADC0D  
R/W  
0
4
ADC2D  
R/W  
0
3
ADC3D  
R/W  
0
2
ADC1D  
R/W  
0
1
AIN1D  
R/W  
0
0
AIN0D  
R/W  
0
R
0
R
0
DIDR0  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
• Bits 1, 0 – AIN1D, AIN0D: AIN1, AIN0 Digital Input Disable  
When this bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the AIN1/0 pin is disabled. The corre-  
sponding PIN Register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When an analog signal is  
applied to the AIN1/0 pin and the digital input from this pin is not needed, this bit should be writ-  
ten logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input buffer.  
80  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
14. Analog to Digital Converter  
14.1 Features  
10-bit Resolution  
0.5 LSB Integral Non-linearity  
± 2 LSB Absolute Accuracy  
13 - 260 µs Conversion Time  
Up to 15 kSPS at Maximum Resolution  
Four Multiplexed Single Ended Input Channels  
Optional Left Adjustment for ADC Result Readout  
0 - VCC ADC Input Voltage Range  
Selectable 1.1V ADC Reference Voltage  
Free Running or Single Conversion Mode  
ADC Start Conversion by Auto Triggering on Interrupt Sources  
Interrupt on ADC Conversion Complete  
Sleep Mode Noise Canceler  
14.2 Overview  
The ATtiny13 features a 10-bit successive approximation ADC. A block diagram of the ADC is  
shown in Figure 14-1.  
Figure 14-1. Analog to Digital Converter Block Schematic  
ADC CONVERSION  
COMPLETE IRQ  
INTERRUPT  
FLAGS  
ADTS[2:0]  
8-BIT DATA BUS  
15  
0
ADC MULTIPLEXER  
SELECT (ADMUX)  
ADC CTRL. & STATUS  
REGISTER (ADCSRA)  
ADC DATA REGISTER  
(ADCH/ADCL)  
TRIGGER  
SELECT  
MUX DECODER  
PRESCALER  
START  
CONVERSION LOGIC  
V
CC  
INTERNAL 1.1V  
REFERENCE  
SAMPLE & HOLD  
COMPARATOR  
10-BIT DAC  
-
+
ADC3  
ADC2  
ADC1  
ADC0  
INPUT  
MUX  
ADC MULTIPLEXER  
OUTPUT  
81  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
The ADC is connected to a 4-channel Analog Multiplexer which allows four single-ended voltage  
inputs constructed from the pins of Port B. The single-ended voltage inputs refer to 0V (GND).  
The ADC contains a Sample and Hold circuit which ensures that the input voltage to the ADC is  
held at a constant level during conversion. Internal reference voltages of nominally 1.1V or VCC  
are provided On-chip.  
14.3 Operation  
The ADC converts an analog input voltage to a 10-bit digital value through successive approxi-  
mation. The minimum value represents GND and the maximum value represents the voltage on  
V
CC or an internal 1.1V reference voltage.  
The analog input channel is selected by writing to the MUX bits in ADMUX. Any of the ADC input  
pins, can be selected as single ended inputs to the ADC.  
The ADC is enabled by setting the ADC Enable bit, ADEN in ADCSRA. Voltage reference and  
input channel selections will not go into effect until ADEN is set. The ADC does not consume  
power when ADEN is cleared, so it is recommended to switch off the ADC before entering power  
saving sleep modes.  
The ADC generates a 10-bit result which is presented in the ADC Data Registers, ADCH and  
ADCL. By default, the result is presented right adjusted, but can optionally be presented left  
adjusted by setting the ADLAR bit in ADMUX.  
If the result is left adjusted and no more than 8-bit precision is required, it is sufficient to read  
ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must be read first, then ADCH, to ensure that the content of the data  
registers belongs to the same conversion. Once ADCL is read, ADC access to data registers is  
blocked. This means that if ADCL has been read, and a conversion completes before ADCH is  
read, neither register is updated and the result from the conversion is lost. When ADCH is read,  
ADC access to the ADCH and ADCL Registers is re-enabled.  
The ADC has its own interrupt which can be triggered when a conversion completes. When ADC  
access to the data registers is prohibited between reading of ADCH and ADCL, the interrupt will  
trigger even if the result is lost.  
14.4 Starting a Conversion  
A single conversion is started by writing a logical one to the ADC Start Conversion bit, ADSC.  
This bit stays high as long as the conversion is in progress and will be cleared by hardware  
when the conversion is completed. If a different data channel is selected while a conversion is in  
progress, the ADC will finish the current conversion before performing the channel change.  
Alternatively, a conversion can be triggered automatically by various sources. Auto Triggering is  
enabled by setting the ADC Auto Trigger Enable bit, ADATE in ADCSRA. The trigger source is  
selected by setting the ADC Trigger Select bits, ADTS in ADCSRB (see description of the ADTS  
bits for a list of the trigger sources). When a positive edge occurs on the selected trigger signal,  
the ADC prescaler is reset and a conversion is started. This provides a method of starting con-  
versions at fixed intervals. If the trigger signal still is set when the conversion completes, a new  
conversion will not be started. If another positive edge occurs on the trigger signal during con-  
version, the edge will be ignored. Note that an Interrupt Flag will be set even if the specific  
interrupt is disabled or the Global Interrupt Enable bit in SREG is cleared. A conversion can thus  
be triggered without causing an interrupt. However, the Interrupt Flag must be cleared in order to  
trigger a new conversion at the next interrupt event.  
82  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 14-2. ADC Auto Trigger Logic  
ADTS[2:0]  
PRESCALER  
CLKADC  
START  
ADIF  
ADATE  
SOURCE 1  
.
.
.
CONVERSION  
LOGIC  
.
EDGE  
DETECTOR  
SOURCE n  
ADSC  
Using the ADC Interrupt Flag as a trigger source makes the ADC start a new conversion as soon  
as the ongoing conversion has finished. The ADC then operates in Free Running mode, con-  
stantly sampling and updating the ADC Data Register. The first conversion must be started by  
writing a logical one to the ADSC bit in ADCSRA. In this mode the ADC will perform successive  
conversions independently of whether the ADC Interrupt Flag, ADIF is cleared or not.  
If Auto Triggering is enabled, single conversions can be started by writing ADSC in ADCSRA to  
one. ADSC can also be used to determine if a conversion is in progress. The ADSC bit will be  
read as one during a conversion, independently of how the conversion was started.  
14.5 Prescaling and Conversion Timing  
By default, the successive approximation circuitry requires an input clock frequency between 50  
kHz and 200 kHz to get maximum resolution. If a lower resolution than 10 bits is needed, the  
input clock frequency to the ADC can be higher than 200 kHz to get a higher sample rate.  
Figure 14-3. ADC Prescaler  
ADEN  
START  
Reset  
7-BIT ADC PRESCALER  
CK  
ADPS0  
ADPS1  
ADPS2  
ADC CLOCK SOURCE  
The ADC module contains a prescaler, which generates an acceptable ADC clock frequency  
from any CPU frequency above 100 kHz. The prescaling is set by the ADPS bits in ADCSRA.  
83  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
The prescaler starts counting from the moment the ADC is switched on by setting the ADEN bit  
in ADCSRA. The prescaler keeps running for as long as the ADEN bit is set, and is continuously  
reset when ADEN is low.  
When initiating a single ended conversion by setting the ADSC bit in ADCSRA, the conversion  
starts at the following rising edge of the ADC clock cycle.  
A normal conversion takes 13 ADC clock cycles. The first conversion after the ADC is switched  
on (ADEN in ADCSRA is set) takes 25 ADC clock cycles in order to initialize the analog circuitry,  
as shown in Figure 14-4 below.  
Figure 14-4. ADC Timing Diagram, First Conversion (Single Conversion Mode)  
Next  
First Conversion  
Conversion  
Cycle Number  
1
2
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
1
2
3
ADC Clock  
ADEN  
ADSC  
ADIF  
Sign and MSB of Result  
LSB of Result  
ADCH  
ADCL  
MUX and REFS  
Update  
Conversion  
Complete  
MUX and REFS  
Update  
Sample & Hold  
When the bandgap reference voltage is used as input to the ADC, it will take a certain time for  
the voltage to stabilize. If not stabilized, the first value read after the first conversion may be  
wrong.  
The actual sample-and-hold takes place 1.5 ADC clock cycles after the start of a normal conver-  
sion and 14.5 ADC clock cycles after the start of an first conversion. When a conversion is  
complete, the result is written to the ADC Data Registers, and ADIF is set. In Single Conversion  
mode, ADSC is cleared simultaneously. The software may then set ADSC again, and a new  
conversion will be initiated on the first rising ADC clock edge.  
Figure 14-5. ADC Timing Diagram, Single Conversion  
One Conversion  
Next Conversion  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
1
2
3
Cycle Number  
ADC Clock  
ADSC  
ADIF  
ADCH  
Sign and MSB of Result  
LSB of Result  
ADCL  
Sample & Hold  
Conversion  
Complete  
MUX and REFS  
Update  
MUX and REFS  
Update  
84  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
When Auto Triggering is used, the prescaler is reset when the trigger event occurs, as shown in  
Figure 14-6 below. This assures a fixed delay from the trigger event to the start of conversion. In  
this mode, the sample-and-hold takes place two ADC clock cycles after the rising edge on the  
trigger source signal. Three additional CPU clock cycles are used for synchronization logic.  
Figure 14-6. ADC Timing Diagram, Auto Triggered Conversion  
One Conversion  
Next Conversion  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
1
2
Cycle Number  
ADC Clock  
Trigger  
Source  
ADATE  
ADIF  
ADCH  
ADCL  
Sign and MSB of Result  
LSB of Result  
Sample &  
Hold  
Prescaler  
Reset  
Conversion  
Complete  
Prescaler  
Reset  
MUX and REFS  
Update  
In Free Running mode, a new conversion will be started immediately after the conversion com-  
pletes, while ADSC remains high.  
Figure 14-7. ADC Timing Diagram, Free Running Conversion  
One Conversion  
Next Conversion  
11  
12  
13  
1
2
3
4
Cycle Number  
ADC Clock  
ADSC  
ADIF  
ADCH  
ADCL  
Sign and MSB of Result  
LSB of Result  
Sample & Hold  
Conversion  
Complete  
MUX and REFS  
Update  
85  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
For a summary of conversion times, see Table 14-1.  
Table 14-1. ADC Conversion Time  
Sample & Hold (Cycles  
Condition  
from Start of Conversion)  
Conversion Time (Cycles)  
First conversion  
13.5  
1.5  
2
25  
13  
Normal conversions  
Auto Triggered conversions  
13.5  
14.6 Changing Channel or Reference Selection  
The MUXn and REFS1:0 bits in the ADMUX Register are single buffered through a temporary  
register to which the CPU has random access. This ensures that the channels and reference  
selection only takes place at a safe point during the conversion. The channel and reference  
selection is continuously updated until a conversion is started. Once the conversion starts, the  
channel and reference selection is locked to ensure a sufficient sampling time for the ADC. Con-  
tinuous updating resumes in the last ADC clock cycle before the conversion completes (ADIF in  
ADCSRA is set). Note that the conversion starts on the following rising ADC clock edge after  
ADSC is written. The user is thus advised not to write new channel or reference selection values  
to ADMUX until one ADC clock cycle after ADSC is written.  
If Auto Triggering is used, the exact time of the triggering event can be indeterministic. Special  
care must be taken when updating the ADMUX Register, in order to control which conversion  
will be affected by the new settings.  
If both ADATE and ADEN is written to one, an interrupt event can occur at any time. If the  
ADMUX Register is changed in this period, the user cannot tell if the next conversion is based  
on the old or the new settings. ADMUX can be safely updated in the following ways:  
• When ADATE or ADEN is cleared.  
• During conversion, minimum one ADC clock cycle after the trigger event.  
• After a conversion, before the Interrupt Flag used as trigger source is cleared.  
When updating ADMUX in one of these conditions, the new settings will affect the next ADC  
conversion.  
14.6.1  
ADC Input Channels  
When changing channel selections, the user should observe the following guidelines to ensure  
that the correct channel is selected:  
In Single Conversion mode, always select the channel before starting the conversion. The chan-  
nel selection may be changed one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However, the  
simplest method is to wait for the conversion to complete before changing the channel selection.  
In Free Running mode, always select the channel before starting the first conversion. The chan-  
nel selection may be changed one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However, the  
simplest method is to wait for the first conversion to complete, and then change the channel  
selection. Since the next conversion has already started automatically, the next result will reflect  
the previous channel selection. Subsequent conversions will reflect the new channel selection.  
86  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
14.6.2  
ADC Voltage Reference  
The reference voltage for the ADC (VREF) indicates the conversion range for the ADC. Single  
ended channels that exceed VREF will result in codes close to 0x3FF. VREF can be selected as  
either VCC, or internal 1.1V reference. The first ADC conversion result after switching reference  
voltage source may be inaccurate, and the user is advised to discard this result.  
14.7 ADC Noise Canceler  
The ADC features a noise canceler that enables conversion during sleep mode to reduce noise  
induced from the CPU core and other I/O peripherals. The noise canceler can be used with ADC  
Noise Reduction and Idle mode. To make use of this feature, the following procedure should be  
used:  
• Make sure that the ADC is enabled and is not busy converting. Single Conversion mode must  
be selected and the ADC conversion complete interrupt must be enabled.  
• Enter ADC Noise Reduction mode (or Idle mode). The ADC will start a conversion once the  
CPU has been halted.  
• If no other interrupts occur before the ADC conversion completes, the ADC interrupt will  
wake up the CPU and execute the ADC Conversion Complete interrupt routine. If another  
interrupt wakes up the CPU before the ADC conversion is complete, the interrupt will be  
executed, and an ADC Conversion Complete interrupt request will be generated when the  
ADC conversion completes. The CPU will remain in active mode until a new sleep command  
is executed.  
Note that the ADC will not be automatically turned off when entering other sleep modes than Idle  
mode and ADC Noise Reduction mode. The user is advised to write zero to ADEN before enter-  
ing such sleep modes to avoid excessive power consumption.  
14.8 Analog Input Circuitry  
The analog input circuitry for single ended channels is shown in Figure 14-8 An analog source  
applied to ADCn is subjected to pin capacitance and input leakage of that pin, regardless if the  
channel is chosen as input for the ADC, or not. When the channel is selected, the source drives  
the S/H capacitor through the series resistance (combined resistance in input path).  
Figure 14-8. Analog Input Circuitry  
IIH  
n
1..100 kohm  
CS/H= 14 pF  
IIL  
Note:  
The capacitor in the figure depicts the total capacitance, including the sample/hold capacitor and  
any stray or parasitic capacitance inside the device. The value given is worst case.  
87  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
The ADC is optimized for analog signals with an output impedance of approximately 10 kΩ or  
less. If such a source is used, the sampling time will be negligible. If a source with higher imped-  
ance is used, the sampling time will depend on how long time the source needs to charge the  
S/H capacitor, with can vary widely. The user is recommended to only use low impedant sources  
with slowly varying signals, since this minimizes the required charge transfer to the S/H  
capacitor.  
Signal components higher than the Nyquist frequency (fADC/2) should not be present to avoid  
distortion from unpredictable signal convolution. The user is advised to remove high frequency  
components with a low-pass filter before applying the signals as inputs to the ADC.  
14.9 Analog Noise Canceling Techniques  
Digital circuitry inside and outside the device generates EMI which might affect the accuracy of  
analog measurements. When conversion accuracy is critical, the noise level can be reduced by  
applying the following techniques:  
• Keep analog signal paths as short as possible.  
• Make sure analog tracks run over the analog ground plane.  
• Keep analog tracks well away from high-speed switching digital tracks.  
• If any port pin is used as a digital output, it mustn’t switch while a conversion is in progress.  
• Place bypass capacitors as close to VCC and GND pins as possible.  
Where high ADC accuracy is required it is recommended to use ADC Noise Reduction Mode, as  
described in Section 14.7 on page 87. This is especially the case when system clock frequency  
is above 1 MHz. A good system design with properly placed, external bypass capacitors does  
reduce the need for using ADC Noise Reduction Mode  
14.10 ADC Accuracy Definitions  
An n-bit single-ended ADC converts a voltage linearly between GND and VREF in 2n steps  
(LSBs). The lowest code is read as 0, and the highest code is read as 2n-1.  
Several parameters describe the deviation from the ideal behavior:  
88  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
• Offset: The deviation of the first transition (0x000 to 0x001) compared to the ideal transition  
(at 0.5 LSB). Ideal value: 0 LSB.  
Figure 14-9. Offset Error  
Output Code  
Ideal ADC  
Actual ADC  
Offset  
Error  
VREF  
Input Voltage  
• Gain Error: After adjusting for offset, the Gain Error is found as the deviation of the last  
transition (0x3FE to 0x3FF) compared to the ideal transition (at 1.5 LSB below maximum).  
Ideal value: 0 LSB  
Figure 14-10. Gain Error  
Gain  
Error  
Output Code  
Ideal ADC  
Actual ADC  
VREF  
Input Voltage  
89  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
• Integral Non-linearity (INL): After adjusting for offset and gain error, the INL is the maximum  
deviation of an actual transition compared to an ideal transition for any code. Ideal value: 0  
LSB.  
Figure 14-11. Integral Non-linearity (INL)  
Output Code  
Ideal ADC  
Actual ADC  
VREF Input Voltage  
• Differential Non-linearity (DNL): The maximum deviation of the actual code width (the interval  
between two adjacent transitions) from the ideal code width (1 LSB). Ideal value: 0 LSB.  
Figure 14-12. Differential Non-linearity (DNL)  
Output Code  
0x3FF  
1 LSB  
DNL  
0x000  
0
VREF Input Voltage  
90  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
• Quantization Error: Due to the quantization of the input voltage into a finite number of codes,  
a range of input voltages (1 LSB wide) will code to the same value. Always ± 0.5 LSB.  
• Absolute Accuracy: The maximum deviation of an actual (unadjusted) transition compared to  
an ideal transition for any code. This is the compound effect of offset, gain error, differential  
error, non-linearity, and quantization error. Ideal value: ± 0.5 LSB.  
14.11 ADC Conversion Result  
After the conversion is complete (ADIF is high), the conversion result can be found in the ADC  
Result Registers (ADCL, ADCH).  
For single ended conversion, the result is  
V
1024  
IN  
ADC = --------------------------  
V
REF  
where VIN is the voltage on the selected input pin and VREF the selected voltage reference (see  
Table 14-2 on page 91 and Table 14-3 on page 92). 0x000 represents analog ground, and  
0x3FF represents the selected reference voltage minus one LSB.  
14.12 Register Description  
14.12.1 ADMUX – ADC Multiplexer Selection Register  
Bit  
7
6
REFS0  
R/W  
0
5
ADLAR  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
1
MUX1  
R/W  
0
0
MUX0  
R/W  
0
ADMUX  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is reserved bit in the ATtiny13 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 6 – REFS0: Reference Selection Bit  
This bit selects the voltage reference for the ADC, as shown in Table 14-2. If this bit is changed  
during a conversion, the change will not go in effect until this conversion is complete (ADIF in  
ADCSRA is set).  
Table 14-2. Voltage Reference Selections for ADC  
REFS0  
Voltage Reference Selection  
CC used as analog reference.  
Internal Voltage Reference.  
0
1
V
Bit 5 – ADLAR: ADC Left Adjust Result  
The ADLAR bit affects the presentation of the ADC conversion result in the ADC Data Register.  
Write one to ADLAR to left adjust the result. Otherwise, the result is right adjusted. Changing the  
ADLAR bit will affect the ADC Data Register immediately, regardless of any ongoing conver-  
sions. For a complete description of this bit, see “ADCL and ADCH – The ADC Data Register” on  
page 93.  
91  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
• Bits 4:2 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13 and will always read as zero.  
• Bits 1:0 – MUX1:0: Analog Channel Selection Bits  
The value of these bits selects which combination of analog inputs are connected to the ADC.  
See Table 14-3 on page 92 for details. If these bits are changed during a conversion, the change  
will not go in effect until this conversion is complete (ADIF in ADCSRA is set).  
Table 14-3. Input Channel Selections  
MUX1..0  
Single Ended Input  
00  
01  
10  
11  
ADC0 (PB5)  
ADC1 (PB2)  
ADC2 (PB4)  
ADC3 (PB3)  
14.12.2 ADCSRA – ADC Control and Status Register A  
Bit  
7
ADEN  
R/W  
0
6
ADSC  
R/W  
0
5
ADATE  
R/W  
0
4
ADIF  
R/W  
0
3
ADIE  
R/W  
0
2
ADPS2  
R/W  
0
1
ADPS1  
R/W  
0
0
ADPS0  
R/W  
0
ADCSRA  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
• Bit 7 – ADEN: ADC Enable  
Writing this bit to one enables the ADC. By writing it to zero, the ADC is turned off. Turning the  
ADC off while a conversion is in progress, will terminate this conversion.  
• Bit 6 – ADSC: ADC Start Conversion  
In Single Conversion mode, write this bit to one to start each conversion. In Free Running mode,  
write this bit to one to start the first conversion. The first conversion after ADSC has been written  
after the ADC has been enabled, or if ADSC is written at the same time as the ADC is enabled,  
will take 25 ADC clock cycles instead of the normal 13. This first conversion performs initializa-  
tion of the ADC.  
ADSC will read as one as long as a conversion is in progress. When the conversion is complete,  
it returns to zero. Writing zero to this bit has no effect.  
• Bit 5 – ADATE: ADC Auto Trigger Enable  
When this bit is written to one, Auto Triggering of the ADC is enabled. The ADC will start a con-  
version on a positive edge of the selected trigger signal. The trigger source is selected by setting  
the ADC Trigger Select bits, ADTS in ADCSRB.  
• Bit 4 – ADIF: ADC Interrupt Flag  
This bit is set when an ADC conversion completes and the data registers are updated. The ADC  
Conversion Complete Interrupt is executed if the ADIE bit and the I-bit in SREG are set. ADIF is  
cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively,  
ADIF is cleared by writing a logical one to the flag. Beware that if doing a Read-Modify-Write on  
ADCSRA, a pending interrupt can be disabled. This also applies if the SBI and CBI instructions  
are used.  
92  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
• Bit 3 – ADIE: ADC Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is written to one and the I-bit in SREG is set, the ADC Conversion Complete Inter-  
rupt is activated.  
• Bits 2:0 – ADPS2:0: ADC Prescaler Select Bits  
These bits determine the division factor between the system clock frequency and the input clock  
to the ADC.  
Table 14-4. ADC Prescaler Selections  
ADPS2  
ADPS1  
ADPS0  
Division Factor  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
2
4
8
16  
32  
64  
128  
14.12.3 ADCL and ADCH – The ADC Data Register  
14.12.3.1 ADLAR = 0  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
ADC9  
ADC8  
ADCH  
ADCL  
ADC7  
ADC6  
ADC5  
ADC4  
ADC3  
ADC2  
ADC1  
ADC0  
7
R
R
0
6
R
R
0
5
R
R
0
4
R
R
0
3
R
R
0
2
R
R
0
1
R
R
0
0
R
R
0
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
14.12.3.2  
ADLAR = 1  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
ADC9  
ADC8  
ADC7  
ADC6  
ADC5  
ADC4  
ADC3  
ADC2  
ADCH  
ADCL  
ADC1  
ADC0  
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
R
R
0
6
R
R
0
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
R
0
R
R
0
R
R
0
R
R
0
R
R
0
R
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
When an ADC conversion is complete, the result is found in these two registers.  
When ADCL is read, the ADC Data Register is not updated until ADCH is read. Consequently, if  
the result is left adjusted and no more than 8-bit precision is required, it is sufficient to read  
ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must be read first, then ADCH.  
93  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
The ADLAR bit in ADMUX, and the MUXn bits in ADMUX affect the way the result is read from  
the registers. If ADLAR is set, the result is left adjusted. If ADLAR is cleared (default), the result  
is right adjusted.  
• ADC9:0: ADC Conversion Result  
These bits represent the result from the conversion, as detailed in “ADC Conversion Result” on  
page 91.  
14.12.4 ADCSRB – ADC Control and Status Register B  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
ADTS2  
R/W  
0
1
ADTS1  
R/W  
0
0
ADTS0  
R/W  
0
ACME  
ADCSRB  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R/W  
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7, 5:3 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13 and will always read as zero.  
• Bits 2:0 – ADTS2:0: ADC Auto Trigger Source  
If ADATE in ADCSRA is written to one, the value of these bits selects which source will trigger  
an ADC conversion. If ADATE is cleared, the ADTS2:0 settings will have no effect. A conversion  
will be triggered by the rising edge of the selected Interrupt Flag. Note that switching from a trig-  
ger source that is cleared to a trigger source that is set, will generate a positive edge on the  
trigger signal. If ADEN in ADCSRA is set, this will start a conversion. Switching to Free Running  
mode (ADTS[2:0]=0) will not cause a trigger event, even if the ADC Interrupt Flag is set.  
Table 14-5. ADC Auto Trigger Source Selections  
ADTS2  
ADTS1  
ADTS0  
Trigger Source  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Free Running mode  
Analog Comparator  
External Interrupt Request 0  
Timer/Counter Compare Match A  
Timer/Counter Overflow  
Timer/Counter Compare Match B  
Pin Change Interrupt Request  
14.12.5 DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0  
Bit  
7
6
5
ADC0D  
R/W  
0
4
3
ADC3D  
R/W  
0
2
ADC1D  
R/W  
0
1
AIN1D  
R/W  
0
0
AIN0D  
R/W  
0
ADC2D  
DIDR0  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R/W  
0
• Bits 5:2 – ADC3D:ADC0D: ADC3:0 Digital Input Disable  
When a bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the corresponding ADC pin is disabled.  
The corresponding PIN register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When an analog  
signal is applied to the ADC7..0 pin and the digital input from this pin is not needed, this bit  
should be written logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input buffer.  
94  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
15. debugWIRE On-chip Debug System  
15.1 Features  
Complete Program Flow Control  
Emulates All On-chip Functions, Both Digital and Analog, except RESET Pin  
Real-time Operation  
Symbolic Debugging Support (Both at C and Assembler Source Level, or for Other HLLs)  
Unlimited Number of Program Break Points (Using Software Break Points)  
Non-intrusive Operation  
Electrical Characteristics Identical to Real Device  
Automatic Configuration System  
High-Speed Operation  
Programming of Non-volatile Memories  
15.2 Overview  
The debugWIRE On-chip debug system uses a One-wire, bi-directional interface to control the  
program flow, execute AVR instructions in the CPU and to program the different non-volatile  
memories.  
15.3 Physical Interface  
When the debugWIRE Enable (DWEN) fuse is programmed and lock bits are unprogrammed,  
the debugWIRE system within the target device is activated. The RESET port pin is configured  
as a wire-AND (open-drain) bi-directional I/O pin with pull-up enabled and becomes the commu-  
nication gateway between target and emulator.  
Figure 15-1 shows the schematic of a target MCU, with debugWIRE enabled, and the emulator  
connector. The system clock is not affected by debugWIRE and will always be the clock source  
selected by the CKSEL fuses.  
Figure 15-1. The debugWIRE Setup  
1.8 - 5.5V  
VCC  
dW  
dW(RESET)  
GND  
95  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
When designing a system where debugWIRE will be used, the following must be observed:  
• Pull-Up resistor on the dW/(RESET) line must be in the range of 10k to 20 kΩ. However, the  
pull-up resistor is optional.  
• Connecting the RESET pin directly to VCC will not work.  
• Capacitors inserted on the RESET pin must be disconnected when using debugWire.  
• All external reset sources must be disconnected.  
15.4 Software Break Points  
debugWIRE supports Program memory Break Points by the AVR Break instruction. Setting a  
Break Point in AVR Studio® will insert a BREAK instruction in the Program memory. The instruc-  
tion replaced by the BREAK instruction will be stored. When program execution is continued, the  
stored instruction will be executed before continuing from the Program memory. A break can be  
inserted manually by putting the BREAK instruction in the program.  
The Flash must be re-programmed each time a Break Point is changed. This is automatically  
handled by AVR Studio through the debugWIRE interface. The use of Break Points will therefore  
reduce the Flash Data retention. Devices used for debugging purposes should not be shipped to  
end customers.  
15.5 Limitations of debugWIRE  
The debugWIRE communication pin (dW) is physically located on the same pin as External  
Reset (RESET). An External Reset source is therefore not supported when the debugWIRE is  
enabled.  
The debugWIRE system accurately emulates all I/O functions when running at full speed, i.e.,  
when the program in the CPU is running. When the CPU is stopped, care must be taken while  
accessing some of the I/O Registers via the debugger (AVR Studio). See the debugWIRE docu-  
mentation for detailed description of the limitations.  
The debugWIRE interface is asynchronous, which means that the debugger needs to synchro-  
nize to the system clock. If the system clock is changed by software (e.g. by writing CLKPS bits)  
communication via debugWIRE may fail. Also, clock frequencies below 100 kHz may cause  
communication problems.  
A programmed DWEN fuse enables some parts of the clock system to be running in all sleep  
modes. This will increase the power consumption while in sleep. Thus, the DWEN fuse should  
be disabled when debugWire is not used.  
15.6 Register Description  
The following section describes the registers used with the debugWire.  
15.6.1  
DWDR –debugWire Data Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DWDR[7:0]  
DWDR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
0
The DWDR Register provides a communication channel from the running program in the MCU  
to the debugger. This register is only accessible by the debugWIRE and can therefore not be  
used as a general purpose register in the normal operations.  
96  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
16. Self-Programming the Flash  
The device provides a Self-Programming mechanism for downloading and uploading program  
code by the MCU itself. The Self-Programming can use any available data interface and associ-  
ated protocol to read code and write (program) that code into the Program memory. The SPM  
instruction is disabled by default but it can be enabled by programming the SELFPRGEN fuse  
(to “0”).  
The Program memory is updated in a page by page fashion. Before programming a page with  
the data stored in the temporary page buffer, the page must be erased. The temporary page buf-  
fer is filled one word at a time using SPM and the buffer can be filled either before the Page  
Erase command or between a Page Erase and a Page Write operation:  
Alternative 1, fill the buffer before a Page Erase  
• Fill temporary page buffer  
• Perform a Page Erase  
• Perform a Page Write  
Alternative 2, fill the buffer after Page Erase  
• Perform a Page Erase  
• Fill temporary page buffer  
• Perform a Page Write  
If only a part of the page needs to be changed, the rest of the page must be stored (for example  
in the temporary page buffer) before the erase, and then be re-written. When using alternative 1,  
the Boot Loader provides an effective Read-Modify-Write feature which allows the user software  
to first read the page, do the necessary changes, and then write back the modified data. If alter-  
native 2 is used, it is not possible to read the old data while loading since the page is already  
erased. The temporary page buffer can be accessed in a random sequence. It is essential that  
the page address used in both the Page Erase and Page Write operation is addressing the  
same page.  
16.1 Performing Page Erase by SPM  
To execute Page Erase, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “00000011” to SPMCSR and  
execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored.  
The page address must be written to PCPAGE in the Z-register. Other bits in the Z-pointer will  
be ignored during this operation.  
Note:  
The CPU is halted during the Page Erase operation.  
16.2 Filling the Temporary Buffer (Page Loading)  
To write an instruction word, set up the address in the Z-pointer and data in R1:R0, write  
“00000001” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The  
content of PCWORD in the Z-register is used to address the data in the temporary buffer. The  
temporary buffer will auto-erase after a Page Write operation or by writing the CTPB bit in  
SPMCSR. It is also erased after a system reset. Note that it is not possible to write more than  
one time to each address without erasing the temporary buffer.  
97  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
If the EEPROM is written in the middle of an SPM Page Load operation, all data loaded will be  
lost.  
16.3 Performing a Page Write  
To execute Page Write, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “00000101” to SPMCSR and  
execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored.  
The page address must be written to PCPAGE. Other bits in the Z-pointer must be written to  
zero during this operation.  
Note:  
The CPU is halted during the Page Write operation.  
16.4 Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming  
The Z-pointer is used to address the SPM commands.  
Bit  
15  
Z15  
Z7  
7
14  
Z14  
Z6  
6
13  
Z13  
Z5  
5
12  
Z12  
Z4  
4
11  
Z11  
Z3  
3
10  
Z10  
Z2  
2
9
Z9  
Z1  
1
8
Z8  
Z0  
0
ZH (R31)  
ZL (R30)  
Since the Flash is organized in pages (see Table 17-5 on page 104), the Program Counter can  
be treated as having two different sections. One section, consisting of the least significant bits, is  
addressing the words within a page, while the most significant bits are addressing the pages.  
This is shown in Figure 16-1. Note that the Page Erase and Page Write operations are  
addressed independently. Therefore it is of major importance that the software addresses the  
same page in both the Page Erase and Page Write operation.  
Figure 16-1. Addressing the Flash During SPM(1)  
BIT 15  
ZPCMSB  
ZPAGEMSB  
1
0
0
Z - REGISTER  
PCMSB  
PAGEMSB  
PCWORD  
PROGRAM  
COUNTER  
PCPAGE  
PAGE ADDRESS  
WITHIN THE FLASH  
WORD ADDRESS  
WITHIN A PAGE  
PROGRAM MEMORY  
PAGE  
PAGE  
INSTRUCTION WORD  
PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]:  
00  
01  
02  
PAGEEND  
Note:  
1. The variables used in Figure 16-1 are listed in Table 17-5 on page 104.  
98  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
The LPM instruction uses the Z-pointer to store the address. Since this instruction addresses the  
Flash byte-by-byte, also the LSB (bit Z0) of the Z-pointer is used.  
16.5 EEPROM Write Prevents Writing to SPMCSR  
Note that an EEPROM write operation will block all software programming to Flash. Reading the  
fuses and lock bits from software will also be prevented during the EEPROM write operation. It is  
recommended that the user checks the status bit (EEPE) in the EECR Register and verifies that  
the bit is cleared before writing to the SPMCSR Register.  
16.6 Reading Fuse and Lock Bits from Firmware  
It is possible to read fuse and lock bits from software.  
16.6.1  
Reading Lock Bits from Firmware  
Issuing an LPM instruction within three CPU cycles after RFLB and SELFPRGEN bits have  
been set in SPMCSR will return lock bit values in the destination register. The RFLB and SELF-  
PRGEN bits automatically clear upon completion of reading the lock bits, or if no LPM instruction  
is executed within three CPU cycles, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four CPU cycles.  
When RFLB and SELFPRGEN are cleared, LPM functions normally.  
To read the lock bits, follow the below procedure.  
1. Load the Z-pointer with 0x0001.  
2. Set RFLB and SELFPRGEN bits in SPMCSR.  
3. Issuing an LPM instruction within three clock cycles will return lock bits in the destina-  
tion register.  
If successful, the contents of the destination register are as follows.  
Bit  
Rd  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LB2  
LB1  
See section “Program And Data Memory Lock Bits” on page 102 for more information on lock  
bits.  
16.6.2  
Reading Fuse Bits from Firmware  
The algorithm for reading fuse bytes is similar to the one described above for reading lock bits,  
only the addresses are different.  
To read the Fuse Low Byte (FLB), follow the below procedure:  
1. Load the Z-pointer with 0x0000.  
2. Set RFLB and SELFPRGEN bits in SPMCSR.  
3. Issuing an LPM instruction within three clock cycles will FLB in the destination register.  
If successful, the contents of the destination register are as follows.  
Bit  
Rd  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FLB7  
FLB6  
FLB5  
FLB4  
FLB3  
FLB2  
FLB1  
FLB0  
99  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
To read the Fuse High Byte (FHB), simply replace the address in the Z-pointer with 0x0003 and  
repeat the procedure above.  
If successful, the contents of the destination register are as follows.  
Bit  
Rd  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FHB7  
FHB6  
FHB5  
FHB4  
FHB3  
FHB2  
FHB1  
FHB0  
See sections “Program And Data Memory Lock Bits” on page 102 and “Fuse Bytes” on page 103  
for more information on fuse and lock bits.  
16.7 Preventing Flash Corruption  
During periods of low VCC, the Flash program can be corrupted because the supply voltage is  
too low for the CPU and the Flash to operate properly. These issues are the same as for board  
level systems using the Flash, and the same design solutions should be applied.  
A Flash program corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too low. First, a  
regular write sequence to the Flash requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly. Secondly,  
the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the supply voltage for executing instructions  
is too low.  
Flash corruption can easily be avoided by following these design recommendations (one is  
sufficient):  
1. Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage.  
This can be done by enabling the internal Brown-out Detector (BOD) if the operating  
voltage matches the detection level. If not, an external low VCC reset protection circuit  
can be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progress, the write operation  
will be completed provided that the power supply voltage is sufficient.  
2. Keep the AVR core in Power-down sleep mode during periods of low VCC. This will pre-  
vent the CPU from attempting to decode and execute instructions, effectively protecting  
the SPMCSR Register and thus the Flash from unintentional writes.  
16.8 Programming Time for Flash when Using SPM  
The calibrated RC Oscillator is used to time Flash accesses. Table 16-1 on page 100 shows the  
typical programming time for Flash accesses from the CPU.  
Table 16-1. SPM Programming Time(1)  
Symbol  
Min Programming Time  
Max Programming Time  
Flash write (Page Erase, Page Write, and  
write lock bits by SPM)  
3.7 ms  
4.5 ms  
Note:  
1. The min and max programming times is per individual operation.  
100  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
16.9 Register Description  
16.9.1  
SPMCSR – Store Program Memory Control and Status Register  
The Store Program Memory Control and Status Register contains the control bits needed to con-  
trol the Program memory operations.  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
CTPB  
R/W  
0
3
RFLB  
R/W  
0
2
PGWRT  
R/W  
0
1
PGERS  
R/W  
0
0
SELFPRGEN  
SPMCSR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R/W  
0
• Bits 7..5 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny13 and always read as zero.  
• Bit 4 – CTPB: Clear Temporary Page Buffer  
If the CTPB bit is written while filling the temporary page buffer, the temporary page buffer will be  
cleared and the data will be lost.  
• Bit 3 – RFLB: Read Fuse and Lock Bits  
An LPM instruction within three cycles after RFLB and SELFPRGEN are set in the SPMCSR  
Register, will read either the lock bits or the fuse bits (depending on Z0 in the Z-pointer) into the  
destination register. See “EEPROM Write Prevents Writing to SPMCSR” on page 99 for details.  
• Bit 2 – PGWRT: Page Write  
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SELFPRGEN, the next SPM instruction within four  
clock cycles executes Page Write, with the data stored in the temporary buffer. The page  
address is taken from the high part of the Z-pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The  
PGWRT bit will auto-clear upon completion of a Page Write, or if no SPM instruction is executed  
within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted during the entire Page Write operation.  
• Bit 1 – PGERS: Page Erase  
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SELFPRGEN, the next SPM instruction within four  
clock cycles executes Page Erase. The page address is taken from the high part of the Z-  
pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGERS bit will auto-clear upon completion of a  
Page Erase, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted dur-  
ing the entire Page Write operation.  
• Bit 0 – SELFPRGEN: Self Programming Enable  
This bit enables the SPM instruction for the next four clock cycles. If written to one together with  
either CTPB, RFLB, PGWRT, or PGERS, the following SPM instruction will have a special  
meaning, see description above. If only SELFPRGEN is written, the following SPM instruction  
will store the value in R1:R0 in the temporary page buffer addressed by the Z-pointer. The LSB  
of the Z-pointer is ignored. The SELFPRGEN bit will auto-clear upon completion of an SPM  
instruction, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. During Page Erase and  
Page Write, the SELFPRGEN bit remains high until the operation is completed.  
Writing any other combination than “10001”, “01001”, “00101”, “00011” or “00001” in the lower  
five bits will have no effect.  
101  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
17. Memory Programming  
This section describes how ATtiny13 memories can be programmed.  
17.1 Program And Data Memory Lock Bits  
ATtiny13 provides two lock bits which can be left unprogrammed (“1”) or can be programmed  
(“0”) to obtain the additional security listed in Table 17-2 on page 102. The lock bits can be  
erased to “1” with the Chip Erase command, only.  
Program memory can be read out via the debugWIRE interface when the DWEN fuse is pro-  
grammed, even if the lock bits are set. Thus, when lock bit security is required, debugWIRE  
should always be disabled by clearing the DWEN fuse.  
Table 17-1. Lock Bit Byte  
Lock Bit Byte  
Bit No  
Description  
Default Value (1)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LB2  
LB1  
Lock bit  
Lock bit  
Note:  
1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed  
Table 17-2. Lock Bit Protection Modes  
Memory Lock Bits (1) (2)  
LB Mode  
LB2  
LB1  
Protection Type  
1
1
1
No memory lock features enabled.  
Further programming of the Flash and EEPROM is disabled in  
High-voltage and Serial Programming mode. Fuse bits are  
locked in both Serial and High-voltage Programming mode.  
debugWire is disabled.  
2
3
1
0
0
0
Further programming and verification of the Flash and  
EEPROM is disabled in High-voltage and Serial Programming  
mode. Fuse bits are locked in both Serial and High-voltage  
Programming mode. debugWire is disabled.  
Notes: 1. Program fuse bits before lock bits. See section “Fuse Bytes” on page 103.  
2. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed  
102  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
17.2 Fuse Bytes  
The ATtiny13 has two fuse bytes. Table 17-3 on page 103 and Table 17-4 on page 103 describe  
briefly the functionality of all the fuses and how they are mapped into the fuse bytes. Note that  
the fuses are read as logical zero, “0”, if they are programmed.  
Table 17-3. Fuse High Byte  
Fuse Bit  
Bit No  
Description  
Default Value  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
SELFPRGEN(1)  
DWEN(2)  
Self Programming Enable  
debugWire Enable  
Brown-out Detector trigger level  
Brown-out Detector trigger level  
External Reset disable  
BODLEVEL1(3)  
BODLEVEL0(3)  
RSTDISBL(4)  
Notes: 1. Enables SPM instruction. See “Self-Programming the Flash” on page 97.  
2. DWEN must be unprogrammed when lock Bit security is required. See “Program And Data  
Memory Lock Bits” on page 102.  
3. See Table 18-5 on page 119 for BODLEVEL fuse decoding.  
4. See “Alternate Functions of Port B” on page 54 for description of RSTDISBL and DWEN fuses.  
When programming the RSTDISBL fuse, High-voltage Serial programming has to be used to  
change fuses to perform further programming.  
Table 17-4. Fuse Low Byte  
Fuse Bit  
Bit No  
Description  
Default Value  
Enable Serial Programming and Data  
Downloading  
0 (programmed)  
(SPI prog. enabled)  
SPIEN(1)  
7
Preserve EEPROM memory through  
Chip Erase  
1 (unprogrammed)  
(memory not preserved)  
EESAVE  
6
WDTON(2)  
CKDIV8(3)  
SUT1(4)  
5
4
3
2
1
0
Watchdog Timer always on  
Divide clock by 8  
1 (unprogrammed)  
0 (programmed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
0 (programmed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
0 (programmed)  
Select start-up time  
Select start-up time  
Select Clock source  
Select Clock source  
SUT0(4)  
CKSEL1(5)  
CKSEL0(5)  
Notes: 1. The SPIEN fuse is not accessible in SPI Programming mode.  
2. Programming this fues will disable the Watchdog Timer Interrupt. See “Watchdog Timer” on  
page 37 for details.  
3. See “System Clock Prescaler” on page 26 for details.  
4. The default value of SUT1..0 results in maximum start-up time for the default clock source.  
See Table 18-3 on page 118 for details.  
5. The default setting of CKSEL1..0 results in internal RC Oscillator @ 9.6 MHz. See Table 18-3  
on page 118 for details.  
103  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Note that fuse bits are locked if Lock Bit 1 (LB1) is programmed. Program the fuse bits before  
programming the lock bits. The status of the fuse bits is not affected by Chip Erase.  
Fuse bits can also be read by the device firmware. See section “Reading Fuse and Lock Bits  
from Firmware” on page 99.  
17.2.1  
Latching of Fuses  
The fuse values are latched when the device enters programming mode and changes of the  
fuse values will have no effect until the part leaves Programming mode. This does not apply to  
the EESAVE fuse which will take effect once it is programmed. The fuses are also latched on  
Power-up in Normal mode.  
17.3 Calibration Bytes  
The signature area of the ATtiny13 contains two bytes of calibration data for the internal oscilla-  
tor. The calibration data in the high byte of address 0x00 is for use with the oscillator set to 9.6  
MHz operation. During reset, this byte is automatically written into the OSCCAL register to  
ensure correct frequency of the oscillator.  
There is a separate calibration byte for the internal oscillator in 4.8 MHz mode of operation but  
this data is not loaded automatically. The hardware always loads the 9.6 MHz calibraiton data  
during reset. To use separate calibration data for the oscillator in 4.8 MHz mode the OSCCAL  
register must be updated by firmware. The calibration data for 4.8 MHz operation is located in  
the high byte at address 0x01 of the signature area.  
17.4 Signature Bytes  
All Atmel microcontrollers have a three-byte signature code which identifies the device. This  
code can be read in both serial and high-voltage programming mode, even when the device is  
locked. The three bytes reside in a separate address space.  
For the ATtiny13 the signature bytes are:  
• 0x000: 0x1E (indicates manufactured by Atmel).  
• 0x001: 0x90 (indicates 1 KB Flash memory).  
• 0x002: 0x07 (indicates ATtiny13 device when 0x001 is 0x90).  
17.5 Page Size  
Table 17-5. No. of Words in a Page and No. of Pages in the Flash  
Flash Size  
Page Size  
PCWORD  
No. of Pages  
PCPAGE  
PCMSB  
512 words (1K byte)  
16 words  
PC[3:0]  
32  
PC[8:4]  
8
Table 17-6. No. of Words in a Page and No. of Pages in the EEPROM  
EEPROM Size  
Page Size  
PCWORD  
No. of Pages  
PCPAGE  
EEAMSB  
64 bytes  
4 bytes  
EEA[1:0]  
16  
EEA[5:2]  
5
104  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
17.6 Serial Programming  
Both the Flash and EEPROM memory arrays can be programmed using the serial SPI bus while  
RESET is pulled to GND. The serial interface consists of pins SCK, MOSI (input) and MISO (out-  
put). See Figure 17-1.  
Figure 17-1. Serial Programming and Verify  
+1.8 - 5.5V  
PB5  
VCC  
PB2  
RESET  
SCK  
PB1  
PB0  
MISO  
MOSI  
GND  
Note:  
If clocked by internal oscillator there is no need to connect a clock source to the CLKI pin.  
After RESET is set low, the Programming Enable instruction needs to be executed first before  
program/erase operations can be executed.  
Table 17-7. Pin Mapping Serial Programming  
Symbol  
MOSI  
MISO  
SCK  
Pins  
PB0  
PB1  
PB2  
I/O  
Description  
Serial Data in  
Serial Data out  
Serial Clock  
I
O
I
Note:  
In Table 17-7 above, the pin mapping for SPI programming is listed. Not all parts use the SPI pins  
dedicated for the internal SPI interface.  
When programming the EEPROM, an auto-erase cycle is built into the self-timed programming  
operation (in the Serial mode ONLY) and there is no need to first execute the Chip Erase  
instruction. The Chip Erase operation turns the content of every memory location in both the  
Program and EEPROM arrays into 0xFF.  
Depending on CKSEL fuses, a valid clock must be present. The minimum low and high periods  
for the serial clock (SCK) input are defined as follows:  
Low: > 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12 MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12 MHz  
High: > 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12 MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12 MHz  
105  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
17.6.1  
Serial Programming Algorithm  
When writing serial data to the ATtiny13, data is clocked on the rising edge of SCK.  
When reading data from the ATtiny13, data is clocked on the falling edge of SCK. See Figure  
18-5 on page 121 and Figure 18-4 on page 121 for timing details.  
To program and verify the ATtiny13 in the Serial Programming mode, the following sequence is  
recommended (see four byte instruction formats in Table 17-9 on page 107):  
1. Power-up sequence:  
Apply power between VCC and GND while RESET and SCK are set to “0”. In some sys-  
tems, the programmer can not guarantee that SCK is held low during power-up. In this  
case, RESET must be given a positive pulse after SCK has been set to “0”. The pulse  
duration must be at least tRST (miniumum pulse widht of RESET pin, see Table 18-4 on  
page 119) plus two CPU clock cycles.  
2. Wait for at least 20 ms and enable serial programming by sending the Programming  
Enable serial instruction to pin MOSI.  
3. The serial programming instructions will not work if the communication is out of syn-  
chronization. When in sync. the second byte (0x53), will echo back when issuing the  
third byte of the Programming Enable instruction. Whether the echo is correct or not, all  
four bytes of the instruction must be transmitted. If the 0x53 did not echo back, give  
RESET a positive pulse and issue a new Programming Enable command.  
4. The Flash is programmed one page at a time. The memory page is loaded one byte at  
a time by supplying the 4 LSB of the address and data together with the Load Program  
memory Page instruction. To ensure correct loading of the page, the data low byte must  
be loaded before data high byte is applied for a given address. The Program memory  
Page is stored by loading the Write Program memory Page instruction with the 5 MSB  
of the address. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not used, the user must wait at least tWD_FLASH  
before issuing the next page. (See Table 17-8 on page 107.) Accessing the serial pro-  
gramming interface before the Flash write operation completes can result in incorrect  
programming.  
5. A: The EEPROM array is programmed one byte at a time by supplying the address and  
data together with the appropriate Write instruction. An EEPROM memory location is  
first automatically erased before new data is written. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not used,  
the user must wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next byte. (See Table 17-8 on  
page 107.) In a chip erased device, no 0xFFs in the data file(s) need to be pro-  
grammed.  
B: The EEPROM array is programmed one page at a time. The Memory page is loaded  
one byte at a time by supplying the 2 LSB of the address and data together with the  
Load EEPROM Memory Page instruction. The EEPROM Memory Page is stored by  
loading the Write EEPROM Memory Page Instruction with the 4 MSB of the address.  
When using EEPROM page access only byte locations loaded with the Load EEPROM  
Memory Page instruction is altered. The remaining locations remain unchanged. If poll-  
ing (RDY/BSY) is not used, the used must wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the  
next page (See Table 17-6 on page 104). In a chip erased device, no 0xFF in the data  
file(s) need to be programmed.  
6. Any memory location can be verified by using the Read instruction which returns the  
content at the selected address at serial output MISO.  
7. At the end of the programming session, RESET can be set high to commence normal  
operation.  
8. Power-off sequence (if needed):  
Set RESET to “1”.  
Turn VCC power off.  
106  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
.
Table 17-8. Minimum Wait Delay Before Writing the Next Flash or EEPROM Location  
Symbol  
Minimum Wait Delay  
4.5 ms  
tWD_FLASH  
tWD_EEPROM  
tWD_ERASE  
tWD_FUSE  
4.0 ms  
9.0 ms  
4.5 ms  
17.6.2  
Serial Programming Instruction set  
The instruction set is described in Table 17-9.  
Table 17-9. Serial Programming Instruction Set  
Instruction Format  
Instruction  
Byte 1  
Byte 2  
Byte 3  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
bbbb bbbb  
Byte4  
Operation  
Enable Serial Programming after  
RESET goes low.  
Programming Enable  
Chip Erase  
1010 1100  
1010 1100  
0010 H000  
0101 0011  
100x xxxx  
0000 000a  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
Chip Erase EEPROM and Flash.  
Read H (high or low) data o from  
Program memory at word address a:b.  
Read Program Memory  
oooo oooo  
Write H (high or low) data i to Program  
memory page at word address b. Data  
low byte must be loaded before Data  
high byte is applied within the same  
address.  
0100 H000  
000x xxxx  
xxxx bbbb  
iiii iiii  
Load Program Memory Page  
Write Program memory Page at  
address a:b.  
0100 1100  
1010 0000  
1100 0000  
0000 000a  
000x xxxx  
000x xxxx  
bbbb xxxx  
xxbb bbbb  
xxbb bbbb  
xxxx xxxx  
oooo oooo  
iiii iiii  
Write Program Memory Page  
Read EEPROM Memory  
Write EEPROM Memory  
Read data o from EEPROM memory at  
address b.  
Write data i to EEPROM memory at  
address b.  
Load data i to EEPROM memory page  
buffer. After data is loaded, program  
EEPROM page.  
Load EEPROM Memory  
Page (page access)  
1100 0001  
1100 0010  
0101 1000  
0000 0000  
00xx xxxx  
0000 0000  
0000 00bb  
xxbbbb00  
xxxx xxxx  
iiii iiii  
Write EEPROM Memory  
Page (page access)  
xxxx xxxx  
xxoo oooo  
Write EEPROM page at address b.  
Read lock bits. “0” = programmed, “1”  
= unprogrammed. See Table 17-1 on  
page 102 for details.  
Read Lock Bits  
Write Lock Bits  
Write lock bits. Set bits = “0” to  
program lock bits. See Table 17-1 on  
page 102 for details.  
1010 1100  
111x xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
11ii iiii  
107  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Table 17-9. Serial Programming Instruction Set (Continued)  
Instruction Format  
Instruction  
Byte 1  
Byte 2  
Byte 3  
Byte4  
Operation  
Read fuse low/high byte. Bit “0” =  
programmed, “1” = unprogrammed.  
See “Fuse Bytes” on page 103 for  
details.  
Read Fuse Byte  
0101 H000  
0000 H000  
xxxx xxxx  
oooo oooo  
Set fuse low/high byte. Set bit to “0” to  
program, “1” to unprogram. See “Fuse  
Bytes” on page 103 for details.  
1010 1100  
1010 H000  
xxxx xxxx  
iiii iiii  
Write Fuse Byte  
0011 0000  
0011 1000  
000x xxxx  
000x xxxx  
xxxx xxbb  
oooo oooo  
oooo oooo  
Read Signature Byte  
Read Calibration Byte  
Read Signature Byte o at address b.  
Read Calibration Byte. See  
“Calibration Bytes” on page 104  
0000 000b  
If o = “1”, a programming operation is  
still busy. Wait until this bit returns to  
“0” before applying another command.  
1111 0000  
0000 0000  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxo  
Poll RDY/BSY  
Note:  
a = address high bits, b = address low bits, H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte, o = data out, i = data in, x = don’t care  
17.7 High-Voltage Serial Programming  
This section describes how to program and verify Flash Program memory, EEPROM Data mem-  
ory, lock bits and fuse bits in the ATtiny13.  
Figure 17-2. High-voltage Serial Programming  
+11.5 - 12.5V  
+1.8 - 5.5V  
PB5  
PB3  
VCC  
PB2  
(RESET)  
SCI  
SDO  
SII  
PB1  
PB0  
GND  
SDI  
108  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Table 17-10. Pin Name Mapping  
Signal Name in High-voltage  
Serial Programming Mode  
Pin Name  
PB0  
I/O  
Function  
SDI  
SII  
I
Serial Data Input  
Serial Instruction Input  
Serial Data Output  
PB1  
I
SDO  
SCI  
PB2  
O
I
PB3  
Serial Clock Input (min. 220ns period)  
The minimum period for the Serial Clock Input (SCI) during High-voltage Serial Programming is  
220 ns.  
Table 17-11. Pin Values Used to Enter Programming Mode  
Pin  
SDI  
SII  
Symbol  
Value  
Prog_enable[0]  
Prog_enable[1]  
Prog_enable[2]  
0
0
0
SDO  
17.7.1  
High-Voltage Serial Programming Algorithm  
To program and verify the ATtiny13 in the High-voltage Serial Programming mode, the following  
sequence is recommended (See instruction formats in Table 17-13 on page 110):  
The following algorithm puts the device in High-voltage Serial Programming mode:  
1. Set Prog_enable pins listed in Table 17-11 to “000”, RESET pin to “0” and Vcc to 0V.  
2. Apply 4.5 - 5.5V between VCC and GND. Ensure that Vcc reaches at least 1.8V within  
the next 20µs.  
3. Wait 20 - 60µs, and apply 11.5 - 12.5V to RESET.  
4. Keep the Prog_enable pins unchanged for at least 10µs after the High-voltage has  
been applied to ensure the Prog_enable Signature has been latched.  
5. Release the Prog_enable[2] pin to avoid drive contention on the Prog_enable[2]/SDO  
pin.  
6. Wait at least 300µs before giving any serial instructions on SDI/SII.  
7. Exit Programming mode by power the device down or by bringing RESET pin to 0V.  
If the rise time of the Vcc is unable to fulfill the requirements listed above, the following alterna-  
tive algorithm can be used.  
1. Set Prog_enable pins listed in Table 17-11 to “000”, RESET pin to “0” and Vcc to 0V.  
2. Apply 4.5 - 5.5V between VCC and GND.  
3. Monitor Vcc, and as soon as Vcc reaches 0.9 - 1.1V, apply 11.5 - 12.5V to RESET.  
4. Keep the Prog_enable pins unchanged for at least 10µs after theHigh-voltage has been  
applied to ensure the Prog_enable Signature has been latched.  
5. Release the Prog_enable[2] pin to avoid drive contention on the Prog_enable[2]/SDO  
pin.  
109  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
6. Wait until Vcc actually reaches 4.5 - 5.5V before giving any serialinstructions on  
SDI/SII.  
7. Exit Programming mode by power the device down or by bringing RESET pin to 0V.  
Table 17-12. High-voltage Reset Characteristics  
Minimum High-voltage Period for  
Supply Voltage  
RESET Pin High-voltage Threshold  
Latching Prog_enable  
VCC  
VHVRST  
12V  
tHVRST  
100 ns  
100 ns  
4.5V  
5.5V  
12  
17.7.2  
High-Voltage Serial Programming Instruction set  
The instruction set is described in Table 17-13.  
Table 17-13. High-Voltage Serial Programming Instruction Set for ATtiny13  
Instruction Format  
Instruction  
Instr.1/5  
Instr.2/6  
Instr.3  
Instr.4  
Operation Remarks  
SDI  
SII  
0_1000_0000_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_0100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Wait after Instr.3 until SDO goes  
high for the Chip Erase cycle to  
finish.  
Chip Erase  
SDO  
SDI  
SII  
0_0001_0000_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Load “Write  
Flash”  
Command  
Enter Flash Programming code.  
SDO  
Repeat after Instr. 1 - 5 until the  
entire page buffer is filled or until all  
data within the page is filled. See  
Note 1.  
SDI 0_ bbbb_bbbb _00  
0_eeee_eeee_00  
0_0010_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_dddd_dddd_00  
0_0011_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1101_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
SII  
0_0000_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
SDO  
Load Flash  
Page Buffer  
SDI  
SII  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Instr 5.  
SDO  
Wait after Instr 3 until SDO goes  
high. Repeat Instr. 2 - 3 for each  
loaded Flash Page until the entire  
Flash or all data is programmed.  
Repeat Instr. 1 for a new 256 byte  
page. See Note 1.  
SDI  
SII  
0_0000_000a_00  
0_0001_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_0100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Load Flash High  
Address and  
Program Page  
SDO  
SDI  
SII  
0_0000_0010_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Load “Read  
Flash”  
Command  
Enter Flash Read mode.  
SDO  
SDI  
SII  
0_bbbb_bbbb_00  
0_0000_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_000a_00  
0_0001_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1000_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1100_00  
q_qqqq_qqqx_xx  
Repeat Instr. 1, 3 - 6 for each new  
address. Repeat Instr. 2 for a new  
256 byte page.  
SDO  
Read Flash Low  
and High Bytes  
SDI  
SII  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1000_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1100_00  
p_pppp_pppx_xx  
Instr 5 - 6.  
SDO  
SDI  
SII  
0_0001_0001_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Load “Write  
EEPROM”  
Command  
Enter EEPROM Programming  
mode.  
SDO  
110  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Table 17-13. High-Voltage Serial Programming Instruction Set for ATtiny13 (Continued)  
Instruction Format  
Instruction  
Instr.1/5  
Instr.2/6  
Instr.3  
Instr.4  
Operation Remarks  
Repeat Instr. 1 - 4 until the entire  
page buffer is filled or until all data  
within the page is filled. See Note  
2.  
SDI  
SII  
0_00bb_bbbb_00  
0_0000_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_eeee_eeee_00  
0_0010_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1101_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Load EEPROM  
Page Buffer  
SDO  
Wait after Instr. 2 until SDO goes  
high. Repeat Instr. 1 - 2 for each  
loaded EEPROM page until the  
entire EEPROM or all data is  
programmed.  
SDI  
SII  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_0100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Program  
EEPROM Page  
SDO  
SDI  
SII  
0_00bb_bbbb_00  
0_0000_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_eeee_eeee_00  
0_0010_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1101_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_0100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Repeat Instr. 1 - 5 for each new  
address. Wait after Instr. 5 until  
SDO goes high. See Note 3.  
SDO  
Write EEPROM  
Byte  
SDI  
SII  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Instr. 5  
SDO  
SDI  
SII  
0_0000_0011_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Load “Read  
EEPROM”  
Command  
Enter EEPROM Read mode.  
SDO  
SDI  
SII  
0_bbbb_bbbb_00  
0_0000_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_aaaa_aaaa_00  
0_0001_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1000_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1100_00  
q_qqqq_qqq0_00  
Repeat Instr. 1, 3 - 4 for each new  
address. Repeat Instr. 2 for a new  
256 byte page.  
Read EEPROM  
Byte  
SDO  
SDI  
SII  
0_0100_0000_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_A987_6543_00  
0_0010_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_0100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Wait after Instr. 4 until SDO goes  
high. Write A - 3 = “0” to program  
the Fuse bit.  
Write Fuse Low  
Bits  
SDO  
SDI  
SII  
0_0100_0000_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_000F_EDCB_00  
0_0010_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_0100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Wait after Instr. 4 until SDO goes  
high. Write F - B = “0” to program  
the Fuse bit.  
Write Fuse High  
Bits  
SDO  
SDI  
0_0010_0000_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0021_00  
0_0010_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_0100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Wait after Instr. 4 until SDO goes  
high. Write 2 - 1 = “0” to program  
the Lock Bit.  
Write Lock Bits SII  
SDO  
SDI  
SII  
0_0000_0100_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1000_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1100_00  
A_9876_543x_xx  
Read Fuse Low  
Bits  
Reading A - 3 = “0” means the  
Fuse bit is programmed.  
SDO  
SDI  
SII  
0_0000_0100_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1010_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1110_00  
x_xxFE_DCBx_xx  
Read Fuse High  
Bits  
Reading F - B = “0” means the fuse  
bit is programmed.  
SDO  
SDI  
0_0000_0100_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1000_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1100_00  
x_xxxx_x21x_xx  
Reading 2, 1 = “0” means the lock  
bit is programmed.  
Read Lock Bits SII  
SDO  
111  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Table 17-13. High-Voltage Serial Programming Instruction Set for ATtiny13 (Continued)  
Instruction Format  
Instruction  
Instr.1/5  
Instr.2/6  
Instr.3  
Instr.4  
Operation Remarks  
SDI  
SII  
0_0000_1000_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_00bb_00  
0_0000_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1000_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0110_1100_00  
q_qqqq_qqqx_xx  
Read Signature  
Bytes  
Repeats Instr 2 4 for each  
signature byte address.  
SDO  
SDI  
SII  
0_0000_1000_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_000b_00  
0_0000_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1000_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0111_1100_00  
p_pppp_pppx_xx  
Read  
Calibration Byte  
SDO  
SDI  
SII  
0_0000_0000_00  
0_0100_1100_00  
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx  
Load “No  
Operation”  
Command  
SDO  
Note:  
Note:  
a = address high bits, b = address low bits, d = data in high bits, e = data in low bits, p = data out high bits, q = data out low bits,  
x = don’t care, 1 = Lock Bit1, 2 = Lock Bit2, 3 = CKSEL0 fuse, 4 = CKSEL1 fuse, 5 = SUT0 fuse, 6 = SUT1 fuse, 7 = CKDIV8,  
fuse, 8 = WDTON fuse, 9 = EESAVE fuse, A = SPIEN fuse, B = RSTDISBL fuse, C = BODLEVEL0 fuse, D= BODLEVEL1 fuse,  
E = MONEN fuse, F = SELFPRGEN fuse  
The EEPROM is written page-wise. But only the bytes that are loaded into the page are actually written to the EEPROM. Page-  
wise EEPROM access is more efficient when multiple bytes are to be written to the same page. Note that auto-erase of  
EEPROM is not available in High-voltage Serial Programming, only in SPI Programming.  
17.8 Considerations for Efficient Programming  
The loaded command and address are retained in the device during programming. For efficient  
programming, the following should be considered.  
• The command needs only be loaded once when writing or reading multiple memory  
locations.  
• Skip writing the data value 0xFF that is the contents of the entire EEPROM (unless the  
EESAVE fuse is programmed) and Flash after a Chip Erase.  
• Address High byte needs only be loaded before programming or reading a new 256 word  
window in Flash or 256 byte EEPROM. This consideration also applies to Signature bytes  
reading.  
17.8.1  
Chip Erase  
The Chip Erase will erase the Flash and EEPROM(1) memories plus lock bits. The lock bits are  
not reset until the Program memory has been completely erased. The fuse bits are not changed.  
A Chip Erase must be performed before the Flash and/or EEPROM are re-programmed.  
1. Load command “Chip Erase” (see Table 17-13 on page 110).  
2. Wait after Instr. 3 until SDO goes high for the “Chip Erase” cycle to finish.  
3. Load Command “No Operation”.  
Note:  
1. The EEPROM memory is preserved during Chip Erase if the EESAVE fuse is programmed.  
112  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
17.8.2  
Programming the Flash  
The Flash is organized in pages, see Table 17-9 on page 107. When programming the Flash,  
the program data is latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of program data to be pro-  
grammed simultaneously. The following procedure describes how to program the entire Flash  
memory:  
1. Load Command “Write Flash” (see Table 17-13 on page 110).  
2. Load Flash Page Buffer.  
3. Load Flash High Address and Program Page. Wait after Instr. 3 until SDO goes high for  
the “Page Programming” cycle to finish.  
4. Repeat 2 through 3 until the entire Flash is programmed or until all data has been  
programmed.  
5. End Page Programming by Loading Command “No Operation”.  
When writing or reading serial data to the ATtiny13, data is clocked on the rising edge of the  
serial clock, see Figure 17-4 on page 114, Figure 18-6 on page 122 and Table 18-9 on page 122  
for details.  
Figure 17-3. Addressing the Flash which is Organized in Pages  
PCMSB  
PAGEMSB  
PCWORD  
PROGRAM  
COUNTER  
PCPAGE  
PAGE ADDRESS  
WITHIN THE FLASH  
WORD ADDRESS  
WITHIN A PAGE  
PROGRAM MEMORY  
PAGE  
PAGE  
INSTRUCTION WORD  
PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]:  
00  
01  
02  
PAGEEND  
113  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Figure 17-4. High-voltage Serial Programming Waveforms  
SDI  
PB0  
MSB  
LSB  
LSB  
SII  
PB1  
MSB  
SDO  
PB2  
MSB  
LSB  
SCI  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
PB3  
17.8.3  
Programming the EEPROM  
The EEPROM is organized in pages, see Table 18-8 on page 121. When programming the  
EEPROM, the data is latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of data to be pro-  
grammed simultaneously. The programming algorithm for the EEPROM Data memory is as  
follows (refer to Table 17-13 on page 110):  
1. Load Command “Write EEPROM”.  
2. Load EEPROM Page Buffer.  
3. Program EEPROM Page. Wait after Instr. 2 until SDO goes high for the “Page Pro-  
gramming” cycle to finish.  
4. Repeat 2 through 3 until the entire EEPROM is programmed or until all data has been  
programmed.  
5. End Page Programming by Loading Command “No Operation”.  
17.8.4  
Reading the Flash  
The algorithm for reading the Flash memory is as follows (refer to Table 17-13 on page 110):  
1. Load Command "Read Flash".  
2. Read Flash Low and High Bytes. The contents at the selected address are available at  
serial output SDO.  
17.8.5  
Reading the EEPROM  
The algorithm for reading the EEPROM memory is as follows (refer to Table 17-13 on page  
110):  
1. Load Command “Read EEPROM”.  
2. Read EEPROM Byte. The contents at the selected address are available at serial out-  
put SDO.  
17.8.6  
Programming and Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits  
The algorithms for programming and reading the fuse low/high bits and lock bits are shown in  
Table 17-13 on page 110.  
114  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
17.8.7  
17.8.8  
Reading the Signature Bytes and Calibration Byte  
The algorithms for reading the Signature bytes and Calibration byte are shown in Table 17-13 on  
page 110.  
Power-off sequence  
Set SCI to “0”. Set RESET to “1”. Turn VCC power off.  
18. Electrical Characteristics  
18.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings*  
*NOTICE:  
Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute  
Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent dam-  
age to the device. This is a stress rating only and  
functional operation of the device at these or  
other conditions beyond those indicated in the  
operational sections of this specification is not  
implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating  
conditions for extended periods may affect  
device reliability.  
Operating Temperature.................................. -55°C to +125°C  
Storage Temperature..................................... -65°C to +150°C  
Voltage on any Pin except RESET  
with respect to Ground ................................-0.5V to VCC+0.5V  
Voltage on RESET with respect to Ground......-0.5V to +13.0V  
Maximum Operating Voltage ............................................ 6.0V  
DC Current per I/O Pin ............................................... 40.0 mA  
DC Current VCC and GND Pins................................ 200.0 mA  
18.2 DC Characteristics  
Table 18-1.  
DC Characteristics, TA = -40°C to +85°C  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Condition  
Min.  
-0.5  
-0.5  
Typ.(1)  
Max.  
0.2VCC  
0.3VCC  
Units  
(2)  
(2)  
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V  
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V  
V
V
Input Low Voltage,  
Any Pin as I/O  
VIL  
Input Low Voltage,  
(2)  
VCC = 1.8V - 5.5  
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V  
-0.5  
0.2VCC  
V
RESET Pin as Reset (3)  
(4)  
(4)  
0.7VCC  
0.6VCC  
VCC + 0.5  
VCC + 0.5  
V
V
Input High Voltage,  
Any Pin as I/O  
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V  
VIH  
Input High Voltage,  
(4)  
VCC = 1.8V - 5.5V  
0.9VCC  
VCC + 0.5  
V
RESET Pin as Reset (3)  
IOL = 20 mA, VCC = 5V  
IOL = 10 mA, VCC = 3V  
IOL = 10 mA, VCC = 5V  
0.7  
0.5  
0.7  
0.5  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
Output Low Voltage,  
Pins PB0 and PB1 (5)  
VOL  
Output Low Voltage,  
Pins PB2, PB3 and PB4 (5)  
I
OL = 5 mA, VCC = 3V  
IOH = -20 mA, VCC = 5V  
OH = -10 mA, VCC = 3V  
4.2  
2.5  
4.2  
2.5  
Output High Voltage,  
Pins PB0 and PB1 (6)  
I
VOH  
IOH = -10 mA, VCC = 5V  
IOH = -5 mA, VCC = 3V  
Output High Voltage,  
Pins PB2, PB3 and PB4 (6)  
Input Leakage  
Current I/O Pin  
ILIL  
VCC = 5.5V, pin low  
-1  
1
µA  
115  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Table 18-1.  
Symbol  
DC Characteristics, TA = -40°C to +85°C (Continued)  
Parameter Condition  
Min.  
Typ.(1)  
Max.  
Units  
Input Leakage  
Current I/O Pin  
ILIH  
VCC = 5.5V, pin high  
-1  
1
µA  
Pull-Up Resistor, I/O Pin  
VCC = 5.5V, input low  
20  
30  
50  
80  
0.35  
1.8  
6
kΩ  
kΩ  
RPU  
Pull-Up Resistor, Reset Pin VCC = 5.5V, input low  
f = 1MHz, VCC = 2V  
0.3  
1.6  
5
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
µA  
Supply Current,  
f = 4MHz, VCC = 3V  
Active Mode  
f = 8MHz, VCC = 5V  
f = 1MHz, VCC = 2V  
0.08  
0.41  
1.6  
5
0.2  
1
ICC  
Supply Current,  
f = 4MHz, VCC = 3V  
Idle Mode  
f = 8MHz, VCC = 5V  
3
WDT enabled, VCC = 3V  
Supply Current,  
Power-Down Mode  
10  
2
WDT disabled, VCC = 3V  
0.5  
µA  
Notes: 1. Typical values at +25°C.  
2. “Max” means the highest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as low.  
3. Not tested in production.  
4. “Min” means the lowest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as high.  
5. Although each I/O port can under non-transient, steady state conditions sink more than the test conditions, the sum of all IOL  
(for all ports) should not exceed 60 mA. If IOL exceeds the test condition, VOL may exceed the related specification. Pins are  
not guaranteed to sink current greater than the listed test condition.  
6. Although each I/O port can under non-transient, steady state conditions source more than the test conditions, the sum of all  
IOH (for all ports) should not exceed 60 mA. If IOH exceeds the test condition, VOH may exceed the related specification. Pins  
are not guaranteed to source current greater than the listed test condition.  
116  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
18.3 Speed Grades  
The maximum operating frequency of the device depends on VCC. As shown in Figure 18-1 and  
Figure 18-2, the maximum frequency vs. VCC relationship is linear between 1.8V < VCC < 2.7V  
and between 2.7V < VCC < 4.5V.  
Figure 18-1. Maximum Frequency vs. VCC for ATtiny13V  
10 MHz  
Safe Operating Area  
4 MHz  
1.8V  
2.7V  
5.5V  
Figure 18-2. Maximum Frequency vs. VCC for ATtiny13  
20 MHz  
10 MHz  
Safe Operating Area  
2.7V  
4.5V  
5.5V  
117  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
18.4 Clock Characteristics  
18.4.1  
Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator Accuracy  
It is possible to manually calibrate the internal oscillator to be more accurate than default factory  
calibration. Note that the oscillator frequency depends on temperature and voltage. Voltage and  
temperature characteristics can be found in Figure 19-50 on page 148, Figure 19-51 on page  
148, Figure 19-52 on page 149, Figure 19-53 on page 149, Figure 19-54 on page 150, and Fig-  
ure 19-55 on page 150.  
Table 18-2. Calibration Accuracy of Internal RC Oscillator  
Calibration  
Method  
Accuracy at given Voltage  
& Temperature(1)  
Target Frequency  
VCC  
Temperature  
Factory  
Calibration  
4.8 / 9.6 MHz  
3V  
25°C  
±10%  
±2%  
Fixed voltage within:  
1.8V – 5.5V(2)  
Fixed temperature  
within:  
-40°C to +85°C  
Fixed frequency within:  
4 – 5 MHz / 8 – 10 MHz  
User  
Calibration  
2.7V – 5.5V(3)  
Notes: 1. Accuracy of oscillator frequency at calibration point (fixed temperature and fixed voltage).  
2. Voltage range for ATtiny13V.  
3. Voltage range for ATtiny13.  
18.4.2  
External Clock Drive  
Figure 18-3. External Clock Drive Waveform  
VIH1  
VIL1  
Table 18-3. External Clock Drive  
VCC = 1.8 - 5.5V  
VCC = 2.7 - 5.5V  
VCC = 4.5 - 5.5V  
Symbol  
1/tCLCL  
tCLCL  
Parameter  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
0
Max.  
Min.  
0
Max.  
Units  
MHz  
ns  
Clock Frequency  
0
4
10  
20  
Clock Period  
250  
100  
100  
100  
40  
50  
20  
20  
tCHCX  
tCLCX  
High Time  
ns  
Low Time  
40  
ns  
tCLCH  
Rise Time  
2.0  
2.0  
2
1.6  
1.6  
2
0.5  
0.5  
2
µs  
tCHCL  
Fall Time  
µs  
ΔtCLCL  
Change in period from one clock cycle to the next  
%
118  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
18.5 System and Reset Characteristics  
Table 18-4. Reset, Brown-out and Internal Voltage Reference Characteristics  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Condition  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (rising) TA = -40 to +85°C  
1.2  
V
VPOT  
Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage  
TA = -40 to +85°C  
1.1  
V
(falling)(1)  
VRST  
tRST  
VHYST  
tBOD  
VBG  
tBG  
RESET Pin Threshold Voltage  
VCC = 1.8V - 5.5V  
VCC = 1.8V - 5.5V  
0.2 VCC  
0.9 VCC  
2.5  
V
µs  
mV  
µs  
V
Minimum pulse width on RESET Pin  
Brown-out Detector Hysteresis  
Min Pulse Width on Brown-out Reset  
Bandgap reference voltage  
50  
2
1.0  
1.1  
40  
15  
1.2  
70  
Bandgap reference start-up time  
Bandgap reference current consumption  
µs  
µs  
IBG  
Note:  
1. The Power-on Reset will not work unless the supply voltage has been below VPOT (falling)  
18.5.1  
Brown-Out Detection  
Table 18-5. VBOT vs. BODLEVEL Fuse Coding  
BODLEVEL [1:0] Fuses  
Min(1)  
Typ(1)  
BOD Disabled  
Max(1)  
Units  
11  
10  
01  
00  
1.8  
2.7  
4.3  
V
Note:  
1. VBOT may be below nominal minimum operating voltage for some devices. For devices where  
this is the case, the device is tested down to VCC = VBOT during the production test. This guar-  
antees that a Brown-out Reset will occur before VCC drops to a voltage where correct  
operation of the microcontroller is no longer guaranteed.  
18.6 Analog Comparator Characteristics  
Table 18-6. Analog Comparator Characteristics, TA = -40°C to +85°C  
Symbol  
VAIO  
Parameter  
Condition  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
40  
Units  
mV  
Input Offset Voltage  
Input Leakage Current  
VCC = 5V, VIN = VCC / 2  
VCC = 5V, VIN = VCC / 2  
VCC = 2.7V  
< 10  
ILAC  
-50  
50  
nA  
750  
500  
100  
75  
Analog Propagation Delay  
(from saturation to slight overdrive)  
V
CC = 4.0V  
VCC = 2.7V  
CC = 4.0V  
VCC = 1.8V - 5.5  
tAPD  
ns  
Analog Propagation Delay  
(large step change)  
V
tDPD  
Note:  
Digital Propagation Delay  
1
2
CLK  
All parameters are based on simulation results and they are not tested in production  
119  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
18.7 ADC Characteristics  
Table 18-7. ADC Characteristics, Single Ended Channels. TA = -40°C to +85°C  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Condition  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Resolution  
10  
Bits  
V
REF = 4V, VCC = 4V,  
2
3
LSB  
LSB  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V  
ADC clock = 1 MHz  
Absolute accuracy  
(Including INL, DNL, and  
Quantization, Gain and Offset  
Errors)  
V
REF = 4V, VCC = 4V  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
1.5  
2.5  
LSB  
LSB  
Noise Reduction Mode  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,  
ADC clock = 1 MHz  
Noise Reduction Mode  
Integral Non-Linearity (INL)  
(Accuracy after Offset and  
Gain Calibration)  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
1
LSB  
Differential Non-linearity  
(DNL)  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
0.5  
2.5  
1.5  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
Gain Error  
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
Offset Error  
Conversion Time  
Free Running Conversion  
13  
50  
260  
1000  
VREF  
µs  
kHz  
V
Clock Frequency  
VIN  
Input Voltage  
GND  
Input Bandwidth  
38.5  
1.1  
kHz  
V
VINT  
RAIN  
Internal Voltage Reference  
Analog Input Resistance  
1.0  
1.2  
100  
MΩ  
120  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
18.8 Serial Programming Characteristics  
Figure 18-4. Serial Programming Timing  
MOSI  
tSLSH  
tOVSH  
tSHOX  
SCK  
tSHSL  
MISO  
Figure 18-5. Serial Programming Waveform  
SERIAL DATA INPUT  
MSB  
LSB  
LSB  
(MOSI)  
SERIAL DATA OUTPUT  
MSB  
(MISO)  
SERIAL CLOCK INPUT  
(SCK)  
SAMPLE  
Table 18-8. Serial Programming Characteristics, TA = -40°C to +85°C, VCC = 1.8 - 5.5V  
(Unless Otherwise Noted)  
Symbol  
1/tCLCL  
tCLCL  
Parameter  
Min  
0
Typ  
Max  
Units  
MHz  
ns  
Oscillator Frequency (ATtiny13V, VCC = 1.8 - 5.5V)  
Oscillator Period (ATtiny13V, VCC = 1.8 - 5.5V)  
Oscillator Frequency (ATtiny13, VCC = 2.7 - 5.5V)  
Oscillator Period (ATtiny13, VCC = 2.7 - 5.5V)  
Oscillator Frequency (ATtiny13, VCC = 4.5V - 5.5V)  
Oscillator Period (ATtiny13, VCC = 4.5V - 5.5V)  
SCK Pulse Width High  
1
1000  
0
1/tCLCL  
tCLCL  
1/tCLCL  
tCLCL  
9.6  
20  
MHz  
ns  
104  
0
MHz  
ns  
50  
(1)  
tSHSL  
2 tCLCL  
ns  
(1)  
tSLSH  
SCK Pulse Width Low  
2 tCLCL  
ns  
tOVSH  
tSHOX  
Note:  
MOSI Setup to SCK High  
tCLCL  
ns  
MOSI Hold after SCK High  
2 tCLCL  
ns  
1. 2 tCLCL for fck < 12 MHz, 3 tCLCL for fck >= 12 MHz  
121  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
18.9 High-voltage Serial Programming Characteristics  
Figure 18-6. High-voltage Serial Programming Timing  
SDI (PB0), SII (PB1)  
tIVSH  
tSLSH  
tSHIX  
SCI (PB3)  
tSHSL  
SDO (PB2)  
tSHOV  
Table 18-9. High-voltage Serial Programming Characteristics  
TA = 25°C, VCC = 5.0V ± 10% (Unless otherwise noted)  
Symbol  
tSHSL  
Parameter  
Min  
110  
110  
50  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
ns  
SCI (PB3) Pulse Width High  
tSLSH  
SCI (PB3) Pulse Width Low  
ns  
tIVSH  
SDI (PB0), SII (PB1) Valid to SCI (PB3) High  
SDI (PB0), SII (PB1) Hold after SCI (PB3) High  
SCI (PB3) High to SDO (PB2) Valid  
Wait after Instr. 3 for Write Fuse Bits  
ns  
tSHIX  
50  
ns  
tSHOV  
16  
ns  
tWLWH_PFB  
2.5  
ms  
122  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
19. Typical Characteristics  
The data contained in this section is largely based on simulations and characterization of similar  
devices in the same process and design methods. Thus, the data should be treated as indica-  
tions of how the part will behave.  
The following charts show typical behavior. These figures are not tested during manufacturing.  
During characterisation devices are operated at frequencies higher than test limits but they are  
not guaranteed to function properly at frequencies higher than the ordering code indicates.  
All current consumption measurements are performed with all I/O pins configured as inputs and  
with internal pull-ups enabled. Current consumption is a function of several factors such as oper-  
ating voltage, operating frequency, loading of I/O pins, switching rate of I/O pins, code executed  
and ambient temperature. The dominating factors are operating voltage and frequency.  
A sine wave generator with rail-to-rail output is used as clock source but current consumption in  
Power-Down mode is independent of clock selection. The difference between current consump-  
tion in Power-Down mode with Watchdog Timer enabled and Power-Down mode with Watchdog  
Timer disabled represents the differential current drawn by the Watchdog Timer.  
The current drawn from pins with a capacitive load may be estimated (for one pin) as follows:  
ICP VCC × CL × fSW  
where VCC = operating voltage, CL = load capacitance and fSW = average switching frequency of  
I/O pin.  
19.1 Active Supply Current  
Figure 19-1. Active Supply Current vs. Frequency (0.1 - 1.0 MHz)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. LOW FREQUENCY  
0.1 - 1.0 MH  
z
1.2  
1
5.5 V  
5.0 V  
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
4.5 V  
4.0 V  
3.3 V  
2.7 V  
1.8 V  
0
0.1  
0.2  
0.3  
0.4  
0.5  
0.6  
0.7  
0.8  
0.9  
1
Frequency (MHz)  
123  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Figure 19-2. Active Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 20 MHz)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. FREQUENCY  
1 - 20MH  
z
14  
12  
10  
8
5.5 V  
5.0 V  
4.5 V  
6
4.0 V  
3.3 V  
2.7 V  
4
2
1.8 V  
0
0
2
4
6
8
10  
Frequency (MHz)  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
Figure 19-3. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 9.6 MHz)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 9.6 MH  
z
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
85 °C  
-40 °C  
25 °C  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
124  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 19-4. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 4.8 MHz)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 4.8 MH  
z
4.5  
4
25 °C  
-40 °C  
85 °C  
3.5  
3
2.5  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 19-5. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal WDT Oscillator, 128 kHz)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL WD OSCILLATOR, 128 KHz  
0.14  
-40 °C  
25 °C  
85 °C  
0.12  
0.1  
0.08  
0.06  
0.04  
0.02  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
125  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Figure 19-6. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (32 kHz External Clock)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
32 kHz EXTERNAL CLOCK  
0.04  
25 °C  
85 °C  
0.035  
0.03  
0.025  
0.02  
0.015  
0.01  
0.005  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
19.2 Idle Supply Current  
Figure 19-7. Idle Supply Current vs. Frequency (0.1 - 1.0 MHz)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. LOW FREQUENCY  
(0.1 - 1.0 MHz)  
0.9  
0.8  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
5.5 V  
5.0 V  
4.5 V  
4.0 V  
3.3 V  
2.7 V  
1.8 V  
0
0.1  
0.2  
0.3  
0.4  
0.5  
0.6  
0.7  
0.8  
0.9  
1
Frequency (MHz)  
126  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 19-8. Idle Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 20 MHz)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. FREQUENCY  
1 - 20MHz  
5
4.5  
4
5.5 V  
3.5  
3
5.0 V  
4.5 V  
2.5  
2
1.5  
4.0 V  
1
3.3 V  
2.7 V  
0.5  
0
1.8 V  
0
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
Frequency (MHz)  
Figure 19-9. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 9.6 MHz)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 9.6 MH  
z
2.5  
2
85 °C  
25 °C  
-40 °C  
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
127  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Figure 19-10. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 4.8 MHz)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 4.8 MH  
z
1.2  
1
85 °C  
25 °C  
-40 °C  
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 19-11. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 128 kHz)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL WD OSCILLATOR, 128 KH  
z
0.035  
0.03  
0.025  
0.02  
0.015  
0.01  
0.005  
0
-40 °C  
25 °C  
85 °C  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
128  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 19-12. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (32 kHz External Clock)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
32kHz EXTERNAL CLOCK  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
85 °C  
25 °C  
-40 °C  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
19.3 Power-Down Supply Current  
Figure 19-13. Power-Down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Disabled)  
POWER-DOWN SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
WATCHDOG TIMER DISABLED  
1.8  
1.6  
1.4  
1.2  
1
85 ˚C  
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
-40 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
129  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Figure 19-14. Power-Down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Enabled)  
POWER-DOWN SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
WATCHDOG TIMER ENABLED  
10  
-40 ˚C  
85 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
19.4 Pin Pull-up  
Figure 19-15. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 5V)  
I/O PIN PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. INPUT VOLTAGE  
VCC = 5V  
160  
140  
25 ˚C  
85 ˚C  
120  
-40 ˚C  
100  
80  
60  
40  
20  
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
VOP (V)  
130  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 19-16. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)  
I/O PIN PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. INPUT VOLTAGE  
V
CC = 2.7  
80  
25 ˚C  
85 ºC  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
-40 ˚C  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
VOP (V)  
2
2.5  
3
Figure 19-17. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 5V)  
RESET PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. RESET PIN VOLTAGE  
VCC = 5V  
120  
25 ˚C  
-40 ˚C  
100  
85 ˚C  
80  
60  
40  
20  
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
VRESET (V)  
131  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Figure 19-18. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)  
RESET PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. RESET PIN VOLTAGE  
VCC = 2.7V  
60  
25 ˚C  
-40 ˚C  
50  
85 ˚C  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
VRESET (V)  
19.5 Pin Driver Strength  
Figure 19-19. I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage (Low Power Ports, VCC = 5V)  
I/O PIN SOURCE CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
LOW POWER PORTS, VCC = 5V  
70  
-40 ˚C  
60  
25 ˚C  
50  
85 ˚C  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
VOH (V)  
132  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 19-20. I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage (Low Power Ports, VCC = 2.7V)  
I/O PIN SOURCE CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
LOW POWER PORTS, VCC = 2.7V  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
-40 °C  
25 °C  
85 °C  
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
VOH (V)  
Figure 19-21. I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage (Low Power Ports, VCC = 1.8V)  
I/O PIN SOURCE CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
LOW POWER PORTS, VCC = 1.8V  
7
-40 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
6
85 ˚C  
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0.2  
0.4  
0.6  
0.8  
1
1.2  
1.4  
1.6  
1.8  
2
VOH (V)  
133  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Figure 19-22. I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage (Low Power Ports, VCC = 5V)  
I/O PIN SINK CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
LOW POWER PORTS, VCC = 5V  
50  
45  
-40 ˚C  
40  
25 ˚C  
35  
85 ˚C  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
VOL (V)  
Figure 19-23. I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage (Low Power Ports, VCC = 2.7V)  
I/O PIN SINK CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
Low Power Ports, VCC = 2.7V  
20  
18  
-40 ˚C  
16  
25 ˚C  
14  
85 ˚C  
12  
10  
8
6
4
2
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
VOL (V)  
134  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 19-24. I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage (Low Power Ports, VCC = 1.8V)  
I/O PIN SINK CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
LOW POWER PORTS, 1.8V  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-40 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
85 ˚C  
0
0.2  
0.4  
0.6  
0.8  
1
1.2  
1.4  
1.6  
1.8  
2
VOL (V)  
Figure 19-25. I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 5V)  
I/O PIN SOURCE CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
VCC = 5V  
90  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
-40 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
85 ˚C  
2
3
4
5
6
VOH (V)  
135  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Figure 19-26. I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)  
I/O PIN SOURCE CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
VCC = 2.7V  
35  
30  
-40 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
25  
85 ˚C  
20  
15  
10  
5
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
VOH (V)  
Figure 19-27. I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 1.8V)  
I/O PIN SOURCE CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
VCC = 1.8V  
10  
-40 ˚C  
9
25 ˚C  
8
85 ˚C  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0.2  
0.4  
0.6  
0.8  
1
1.2  
1.4  
1.6  
1.8  
2
VOH (V)  
136  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 19-28. I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 5V)  
I/O PIN SINK CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
VCC = 5V  
100  
90  
-40 ˚C  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
25 ˚C  
85 ˚C  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
VOL (V)  
Figure 19-29. I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)  
I/O PIN SINK CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
VCC = 2.7V  
40  
35  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
-40 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
85 ˚C  
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
VOL (V)  
137  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Figure 19-30. I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 1.8V)  
I/O PIN SINK CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
VCC = 1.8V  
14  
12  
10  
8
-40 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
85 ˚C  
6
4
2
0
0
0.2  
0.4  
0.6  
0.8  
1
1.2  
1.4  
1.6  
1.8  
2
V
OL (V)  
Figure 19-31. Reset Pin as I/O - Source Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 5V)  
RESET PIN AS I/O - SOURCE CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
VCC = 5V  
1.6  
1.4  
-40 ˚C  
1.2  
25 ˚C  
1
85 ˚C  
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
2
3
4
5
VOH (V)  
138  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 19-32. Reset Pin as I/O - Source Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)  
RESET PIN AS I/O - SOURCE CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
VCC = 2.7V  
2.5  
2
-40 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
85 ˚C  
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
VOH (V)  
Figure 19-33. Reset Pin as I/O - Source Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 1.8V)  
RESET PIN AS I/O - SOURCE CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
VCC = 1.8V  
2.5  
-40 °C  
2
25 °C  
1.5  
85 °C  
1
0.5  
0
0
0.2  
0.4  
0.6  
0.8  
1
1.2  
1.4  
1.6  
1.8  
2
VOH (V)  
139  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Figure 19-34. Reset Pin as I/O - Sink Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 5V)  
RESET PIN AS I/O - SINK CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
VCC = 5V  
14  
-40 ˚C  
12  
25 ˚C  
10  
85 ˚C  
8
6
4
2
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
VOL (V)  
Figure 19-35. Reset Pin as I/O - Sink Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)  
RESET PIN AS I/O - SINK CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
VCC = 2.7V  
4.5  
-40 ˚C  
4
3.5  
25 ˚C  
3
85 ˚C  
2.5  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
VOL (V)  
140  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 19-36. Reset Pin as I/O - Sink Current vs. Output Voltage (VCC = 1.8V)  
RESET PIN AS I/O - SINK CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
VCC = 1.8V  
1.6  
1.4  
-40 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
85 ˚C  
1.2  
1
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
0
0.2  
0.4  
0.6  
0.8  
1
1.2  
1.4  
1.6  
1.8  
2
VOL (V)  
19.6 Pin Thresholds and Hysteresis  
Figure 19-37. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, I/O Pin Read as '1')  
I/O PIN INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIH, IO PIN READ AS '1'  
3
85 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
-40 ˚C  
2.5  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
141  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Figure 19-38. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, I/O Pin Read as '0')  
I/O PIN INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIL, IO PIN READ AS '0'  
3
85 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
-40 ˚C  
2.5  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 19-39. I/O Pin Input Hysteresis vs. VCC  
I/O PIN INPUT HYSTERESIS vs. VCC  
0.45  
0.4  
-40 ºC  
25 ºC  
0.35  
0.3  
0.25  
0.2  
85 ºC  
0.15  
0.1  
0.05  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
142  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 19-40. Reset Pin as I/O - Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, Reset Pin Read as '1')  
RESET PIN AS I/O - THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIH, IO PIN READ AS '1'  
3
2.5  
2
-40 ˚C  
1.5  
25 ˚C  
1
85 ˚C  
0.5  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 19-41. Reset Pin as I/O - Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, Reset Pin Read as '0')  
RESET PIN AS I/O - THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIL, IO PIN READ AS '0'  
2.5  
2
1.5  
85 ˚C  
1
25 ˚C  
0.5  
-40 ˚C  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
143  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Figure 19-42. Reset Pin as I/O - Pin Hysteresis vs. VCC  
RESET PIN AS IO - PIN HYSTERESIS vs. VCC  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
-40 ºC  
25 ºC  
85 ºC  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 19-43. Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, Reset Pin Read as '1')  
RESET INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIH, IO PIN READ AS '1'  
2.5  
2
1.5  
-40 ˚C  
1
85 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
0.5  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
144  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 19-44. Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, Reset Pin Read as '0')  
RESET INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIL, IO PIN READ AS '0'  
2.5  
2
1.5  
1
85 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
-40 ˚C  
0.5  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 19-45. Reset Input Pin Hysteresis vs. VCC  
RESET INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIL, IO PIN READ AS '0'  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
-40 ºC  
85 ºC  
25 ºC  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
145  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
19.7 BOD Thresholds and Analog Comparator Offset  
Figure 19-46. BOD Thresholds vs. Temperature (BODLEVEL is 4.3V)  
BOD THRESHOLDS vs. TEMPERATURE  
BODLEVEL IS 4.3  
V
4.5  
4.4  
4.3  
4.2  
Rising VCC  
Falling VCC  
-60  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
Temperature (C)  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Figure 19-47. BOD Thresholds vs. Temperature (BODLEVEL is 2.7V)  
BOD THRESHOLDS vs. TEMPERATURE  
BODLEVEL IS 2.7  
V
2.9  
2.8  
2.7  
2.6  
Rising VCC  
Falling VCC  
-60  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
Temperature (C)  
40  
60  
80  
100  
146  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 19-48. BOD Thresholds vs. Temperature (BODLEVEL is 1.8V)  
BOD THRESHOLDS vs. TEMPERATURE  
BODLEVEL IS 1.8  
V
1.9  
1.85  
1.8  
Rising VCC  
Falling VCC  
1.75  
-60  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
Temperature (C)  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Figure 19-49. Bandgap Voltage vs. VCC  
BANDGAP VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
1.06  
1.04  
1.02  
1
85ºC  
25ºC  
0.98  
0.96  
0.94  
0.92  
-40ºC  
1.5  
2.5  
3.5  
4.5  
5.5  
VCC (V)  
147  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
19.8 Internal Oscillator Speed  
Figure 19-50. Calibrated 9.6 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature  
CALIBRATED 9.6 MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. TEMPERATURE  
10.3  
10.1  
9.9  
9.7  
9.5  
9.3  
9.1  
8.9  
8.7  
8.5  
5.5 V  
4.5 V  
2.7 V  
1.8 V  
-60  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Temperature (C)  
Figure 19-51. Calibrated 9.6 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC  
CALIBRATED 9.6 MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. VCC  
11  
10.5  
10  
85 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
9.5  
9
-40 ˚C  
8.5  
8
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
148  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 19-52. Calibrated 9.6 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Osccal Value  
CALIBRATED 9.6MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. OSCCAL VALUE  
18  
16  
14  
12  
10  
8
25 ˚C  
6
4
2
0
8
16  
24  
32  
40  
48  
56  
64  
72  
80  
88  
96  
104 112 120  
OSCCAL VALUE  
Figure 19-53. Calibrated 4.8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature  
CALIBRATED 4.8 MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. TEMPERATURE  
5.1  
5
4.9  
4.8  
4.7  
4.6  
4.5  
1.8 V  
5.5 V  
4.0 V  
2.7 V  
-60  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Temperature (C)  
149  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Figure 19-54. Calibrated 4.8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC  
CALIBRATED 4.8 MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. VCC  
5.2  
85 ˚C  
5
4.8  
4.6  
4.4  
25 ˚C  
-40 ˚C  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 19-55. Calibrated 4.8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Osccal Value  
CALIBRATED 4.8 MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. OSCCAL VALUE  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25 ˚C  
0
8
16  
24  
32  
40  
48  
56  
64  
72  
80  
88  
96  
104 112 120 127  
OSCCAL VALUE  
150  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 19-56. 128 kHz Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC  
128 kHz WATCHDOG OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. VCC  
120  
-40 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
115  
110  
105  
100  
85 ˚C  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 19-57. 128 kHz Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature  
128 kHz WATCHDOG OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. TEMPERATURE  
118  
116  
114  
112  
110  
108  
106  
104  
102  
100  
1.8 V  
2.7 V  
4.0 V  
5.5 V  
-60  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Temperature (C)  
151  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
19.9 Current Consumption of Peripheral Units  
Figure 19-58. Brownout Detector Current vs. VCC  
BROWNOUT DETECTOR CURRENT vs. VCC  
35  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
-40 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
85 ˚C  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 19-59. ADC Current vs. VCC  
ADC CURRENT vs. VCC  
350  
300  
250  
200  
150  
100  
50  
-40 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
85 ˚C  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
152  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 19-60. Analog Comparator Current vs. VCC  
ANALOG COMPARATOR CURRENT vs. VCC  
140  
120  
100  
80  
-40 ˚C  
25 ˚C  
85 ˚C  
60  
40  
20  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 19-61. Programming Current vs. VCC  
PROGRAMMING CURRENT vs. Vcc  
4
3.5  
3
2.5  
2
1.5  
1
-40 °C  
25 °C  
0.5  
0
85 °C  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
153  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
19.10 Current Consumption in Reset and Reset Pulse width  
Figure 19-62. Reset Supply Current vs. VCC (0.1 - 1.0 MHz, Excluding Current through the  
Reset Pull-up)  
RESET SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
0.1 - 1.0 MHz, EXCLUDING CURRENT THROUGH THE RESET PULL-UP  
0.14  
0.12  
0.1  
5.5 V  
5.0 V  
4.5 V  
4.0 V  
0.08  
0.06  
0.04  
0.02  
0
3.3 V  
2.7 V  
1.8 V  
0
0.1  
0.2  
0.3  
0.4  
0.5  
0.6  
0.7  
0.8  
0.9  
1
Frequency (MHz)  
Figure 19-63. Reset Supply Current vs. VCC (1 - 24 MHz, Excluding Current through the Reset  
Pull-up)  
RESET SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
1 - 24 MHz, EXCLUDING CURRENT THROUGH THE RESET PULL-UP  
3.5  
5.5V  
5.0V  
4.5V  
3
2.5  
2
1.5  
1
4.0V  
3.3V  
0.5  
0
2.7V  
1.8V  
0
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
Frequency (MHz)  
154  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Figure 19-64. Reset Pulse Width vs. VCC  
RESET PULSE WIDTH vs. V  
CC  
2500  
2000  
1500  
1000  
500  
85 ºC  
25 ºC  
-40 ºC  
0
1.8  
2.1  
2.5  
2.7  
3
3.3  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
6
VCC (V)  
155  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
20. Register Summary  
Address  
Name  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Page  
0x3F  
0x3E  
0x3D  
0x3C  
0x3B  
0x3A  
0x39  
0x38  
0x37  
0x36  
0x35  
0x34  
0x33  
0x32  
0x31  
0x30  
0x2F  
0x2E  
0x2D  
0x2C  
0x2B  
0x2A  
0x29  
0x28  
0x27  
0x26  
0x25  
0x24  
0x23  
0x22  
0x21  
0x20  
0x1F  
0x1E  
0x1D  
0x1C  
0x1B  
0x1A  
0x19  
0x18  
0x17  
0x16  
0x15  
0x14  
0x13  
0x12  
0x11  
0x10  
0x0F  
0x0E  
0x0D  
0x0C  
0x0B  
0x0A  
0x09  
0x08  
0x07  
0x06  
0x05  
0x04  
0x03  
0x02  
0x01  
0x00  
SREG  
Reserved  
SPL  
I
T
H
S
V
N
Z
C
page 9  
SP[7:0]  
page 11  
Reserved  
GIMSK  
INT0  
PCIE  
page 46  
page 47  
page 74  
page 75  
page 97  
page 74  
page 32  
page 41  
page 72  
page 73  
page 27  
GIFR  
INTF0  
PCIF  
TIMSK0  
TIFR0  
OCIE0B  
OCF0B  
RFLB  
OCIE0A  
OCF0A  
PGWRT  
TOIE0  
TOV0  
PGERS  
SELFPR-  
SPMCSR  
OCR0A  
MCUCR  
MCUSR  
TCCR0B  
TCNT0  
CTPB  
Timer/Counter – Output Compare Register A  
PUD  
SE  
SM1  
SM0  
ISC01  
EXTRF  
CS01  
ISC00  
PORF  
CS00  
WDRF  
WGM02  
BORF  
CS02  
FOC0A  
FOC0B  
Timer/Counter (8-bit)  
OSCCAL  
Reserved  
TCCR0A  
DWDR  
Oscillator Calibration Register  
COM0A1  
COM0A0  
COM0B1  
COM0B0  
DWDR[7:0]  
WGM01  
WGM00  
page 69  
page 96  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
OCR0B  
GTCCR  
Reserved  
CLKPR  
Timer/Counter – Output Compare Register B  
page 74  
page 77  
TSM  
PSR10  
CLKPCE  
CLKPS3  
CLKPS2  
CLKPS1  
CLKPS0  
page 28  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
WDTCR  
Reserved  
Reserved  
EEARL  
WDTIF  
WDTIE  
WDP3  
WDCE  
WDE  
WDP2  
WDP1  
EEPE  
WDP0  
EERE  
page 41  
EEPROM Address Register  
EEPROM Data Register  
page 20  
page 20  
page 21  
EEDR  
EECR  
EEPM1  
EEPM0  
EERIE  
EEMPE  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
PORTB  
DDRB  
PORTB5  
DDB5  
PORTB4  
DDB4  
PORTB3  
DDB3  
PORTB2  
DDB2  
PORTB1  
DDB1  
PORTB0  
DDB0  
page 56  
page 56  
PINB  
PINB5  
PINB4  
PINB3  
PINB2  
PINB1  
PINB0  
page 57  
PCMSK  
DIDR0  
PCINT5  
ADC0D  
PCINT4  
ADC2D  
PCINT3  
ADC3D  
PCINT2  
ADC1D  
PCINT1  
AIN1D  
PCINT0  
AIN0D  
page 47  
page 80, page 94  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
ACSR  
ACD  
ACBG  
REFS0  
ADSC  
ACO  
ACI  
ACIE  
ACIS1  
MUX1  
ADPS1  
ACIS0  
MUX0  
ADPS0  
page 79  
page 91  
page 92  
page 93  
page 93  
page 94  
ADMUX  
ADCSRA  
ADCH  
ADLAR  
ADATE  
ADEN  
ADIF  
ADIE  
ADPS2  
ADC Data Register High Byte  
ADC Data Register Low Byte  
ADCL  
ADCSRB  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
ACME  
ADTS2  
ADTS1  
ADTS0  
156  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Notes: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses  
should never be written.  
2. I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these  
registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions.ome of the Status Flags are  
cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVRs, the CBI and SBI instructions will only operation  
the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such Status Flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work  
with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.  
157  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
21. Instruction Set Summary  
Mnemonics  
Operands  
Description  
Operation  
Flags  
#Clocks  
ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC INSTRUCTIONS  
ADD  
ADC  
ADIW  
SUB  
SUBI  
SBC  
SBCI  
SBIW  
AND  
ANDI  
OR  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rdl,K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rdl,K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd  
Add two Registers  
Add with Carry two Registers  
Add Immediate to Word  
Subtract two Registers  
Subtract Constant from Register  
Subtract with Carry two Registers  
Subtract with Carry Constant from Reg.  
Subtract Immediate from Word  
Logical AND Registers  
Logical AND Register and Constant  
Logical OR Registers  
Rd Rd + Rr  
Rd Rd + Rr + C  
Rdh:Rdl Rdh:Rdl + K  
Rd Rd - Rr  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,S  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,S  
Z,N,V  
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Rd Rd - K  
Rd Rd - Rr - C  
Rd Rd - K - C  
Rdh:Rdl Rdh:Rdl - K  
Rd Rd Rr  
Rd Rd K  
Z,N,V  
Rd Rd v Rr  
Z,N,V  
ORI  
Logical OR Register and Constant  
Exclusive OR Registers  
One’s Complement  
Rd Rd v K  
Z,N,V  
EOR  
COM  
NEG  
SBR  
CBR  
INC  
Rd Rd Rr  
Rd 0xFF Rd  
Rd 0x00 Rd  
Rd Rd v K  
Z,N,V  
Z,C,N,V  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,N,V  
Rd  
Two’s Complement  
Rd,K  
Rd,K  
Rd  
Set Bit(s) in Register  
Clear Bit(s) in Register  
Increment  
Rd Rd (0xFF - K)  
Rd Rd + 1  
Z,N,V  
Z,N,V  
DEC  
TST  
Rd  
Decrement  
Rd Rd 1  
Z,N,V  
Rd  
Test for Zero or Minus  
Clear Register  
Rd Rd Rd  
Rd Rd Rd  
Rd 0xFF  
Z,N,V  
CLR  
SER  
Rd  
Z,N,V  
Rd  
Set Register  
None  
BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS  
RJMP  
IJMP  
k
k
Relative Jump  
Indirect Jump to (Z)  
PC PC + k + 1  
PC Z  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
I
2
2
RCALL  
ICALL  
RET  
Relative Subroutine Call  
Indirect Call to (Z)  
PC PC + k + 1  
3
PC Z  
3
Subroutine Return  
PC STACK  
4
RETI  
Interrupt Return  
PC STACK  
4
CPSE  
CP  
Rd,Rr  
Compare, Skip if Equal  
Compare  
if (Rd = Rr) PC PC + 2 or 3  
Rd Rr  
None  
Z, N,V,C,H  
Z, N,V,C,H  
Z, N,V,C,H  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
1/2/3  
1
Rd,Rr  
CPC  
Rd,Rr  
Compare with Carry  
Rd Rr C  
1
CPI  
Rd,K  
Compare Register with Immediate  
Skip if Bit in Register Cleared  
Skip if Bit in Register is Set  
Skip if Bit in I/O Register Cleared  
Skip if Bit in I/O Register is Set  
Branch if Status Flag Set  
Branch if Status Flag Cleared  
Branch if Equal  
Rd K  
1
SBRC  
SBRS  
SBIC  
Rr, b  
if (Rr(b)=0) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (Rr(b)=1) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (P(b)=0) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (P(b)=1) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (SREG(s) = 1) then PCPC+k + 1  
if (SREG(s) = 0) then PCPC+k + 1  
if (Z = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (Z = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N V= 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N V= 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (H = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (H = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (T = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (T = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (V = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (V = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if ( I = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if ( I = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
Rr, b  
P, b  
P, b  
s, k  
s, k  
k
SBIS  
BRBS  
BRBC  
BREQ  
BRNE  
BRCS  
BRCC  
BRSH  
BRLO  
BRMI  
BRPL  
BRGE  
BRLT  
BRHS  
BRHC  
BRTS  
BRTC  
BRVS  
BRVC  
BRIE  
k
Branch if Not Equal  
k
Branch if Carry Set  
k
Branch if Carry Cleared  
Branch if Same or Higher  
Branch if Lower  
k
k
k
Branch if Minus  
k
Branch if Plus  
k
Branch if Greater or Equal, Signed  
Branch if Less Than Zero, Signed  
Branch if Half Carry Flag Set  
Branch if Half Carry Flag Cleared  
Branch if T Flag Set  
k
k
k
k
k
Branch if T Flag Cleared  
Branch if Overflow Flag is Set  
Branch if Overflow Flag is Cleared  
Branch if Interrupt Enabled  
Branch if Interrupt Disabled  
k
k
k
BRID  
k
BIT AND BIT-TEST INSTRUCTIONS  
SBI  
CBI  
P,b  
P,b  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
Set Bit in I/O Register  
Clear Bit in I/O Register  
Logical Shift Left  
I/O(P,b) 1  
I/O(P,b) 0  
None  
None  
2
2
1
1
1
LSL  
LSR  
ROL  
Rd(n+1) Rd(n), Rd(0) 0  
Rd(n) Rd(n+1), Rd(7) 0  
Rd(0)C,Rd(n+1)Rd(n),CRd(7)  
Z,C,N,V  
Z,C,N,V  
Z,C,N,V  
Logical Shift Right  
Rotate Left Through Carry  
158  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Mnemonics  
Operands  
Description  
Operation  
Flags  
#Clocks  
ROR  
ASR  
SWAP  
BSET  
BCLR  
BST  
BLD  
SEC  
CLC  
SEN  
CLN  
SEZ  
CLZ  
SEI  
Rd  
Rd  
Rotate Right Through Carry  
Arithmetic Shift Right  
Swap Nibbles  
Rd(7)C,Rd(n)Rd(n+1),CRd(0)  
Z,C,N,V  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Rd(n) Rd(n+1), n=0..6  
Z,C,N,V  
Rd  
Rd(3..0)Rd(7..4),Rd(7..4)Rd(3..0)  
None  
s
Flag Set  
SREG(s) 1  
SREG(s) 0  
T Rr(b)  
Rd(b) T  
C 1  
SREG(s)  
s
Flag Clear  
SREG(s)  
Rr, b  
Rd, b  
Bit Store from Register to T  
Bit load from T to Register  
Set Carry  
T
None  
C
C
N
N
Z
Clear Carry  
C 0  
Set Negative Flag  
N 1  
Clear Negative Flag  
Set Zero Flag  
N 0  
Z 1  
Clear Zero Flag  
Z 0  
Z
Global Interrupt Enable  
Global Interrupt Disable  
Set Signed Test Flag  
Clear Signed Test Flag  
Set Twos Complement Overflow.  
Clear Twos Complement Overflow  
Set T in SREG  
I 1  
I
CLI  
I 0  
I
SES  
CLS  
SEV  
CLV  
SET  
CLT  
SEH  
CLH  
S 1  
S
S 0  
S
V 1  
V
V 0  
V
T 1  
T
Clear T in SREG  
T 0  
T
Set Half Carry Flag in SREG  
Clear Half Carry Flag in SREG  
H 1  
H
H
H 0  
DATA TRANSFER INSTRUCTIONS  
MOV  
MOVW  
LDI  
LD  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Move Between Registers  
Copy Register Word  
Rd Rr  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
Rd+1:Rd Rr+1:Rr  
Load Immediate  
Rd K  
Rd (X)  
Rd, X  
Load Indirect  
LD  
Rd, X+  
Rd, - X  
Rd, Y  
Load Indirect and Post-Inc.  
Load Indirect and Pre-Dec.  
Load Indirect  
Rd (X), X X + 1  
X X - 1, Rd (X)  
Rd (Y)  
LD  
LD  
LD  
Rd, Y+  
Rd, - Y  
Rd,Y+q  
Rd, Z  
Load Indirect and Post-Inc.  
Load Indirect and Pre-Dec.  
Load Indirect with Displacement  
Load Indirect  
Rd (Y), Y Y + 1  
Y Y - 1, Rd (Y)  
Rd (Y + q)  
Rd (Z)  
LD  
LDD  
LD  
LD  
Rd, Z+  
Rd, -Z  
Rd, Z+q  
Rd, k  
Load Indirect and Post-Inc.  
Load Indirect and Pre-Dec.  
Load Indirect with Displacement  
Load Direct from SRAM  
Store Indirect  
Rd (Z), Z Z+1  
Z Z - 1, Rd (Z)  
Rd (Z + q)  
Rd (k)  
LD  
LDD  
LDS  
ST  
X, Rr  
(X) Rr  
ST  
X+, Rr  
- X, Rr  
Y, Rr  
Store Indirect and Post-Inc.  
Store Indirect and Pre-Dec.  
Store Indirect  
(X) Rr, X X + 1  
X X - 1, (X) Rr  
(Y) Rr  
ST  
ST  
ST  
Y+, Rr  
- Y, Rr  
Y+q,Rr  
Z, Rr  
Store Indirect and Post-Inc.  
Store Indirect and Pre-Dec.  
Store Indirect with Displacement  
Store Indirect  
(Y) Rr, Y Y + 1  
Y Y - 1, (Y) Rr  
(Y + q) Rr  
ST  
STD  
ST  
(Z) Rr  
ST  
Z+, Rr  
-Z, Rr  
Z+q,Rr  
k, Rr  
Store Indirect and Post-Inc.  
Store Indirect and Pre-Dec.  
Store Indirect with Displacement  
Store Direct to SRAM  
Load Program Memory  
Load Program Memory  
Load Program Memory and Post-Inc  
Store Program Memory  
In Port  
(Z) Rr, Z Z + 1  
Z Z - 1, (Z) Rr  
(Z + q) Rr  
ST  
STD  
STS  
LPM  
LPM  
LPM  
SPM  
IN  
(k) Rr  
R0 (Z)  
Rd, Z  
Rd (Z)  
Rd, Z+  
Rd (Z), Z Z+1  
(z) R1:R0  
Rd, P  
P, Rr  
Rr  
Rd P  
1
1
2
2
OUT  
PUSH  
POP  
Out Port  
P Rr  
Push Register on Stack  
Pop Register from Stack  
STACK Rr  
Rd STACK  
Rd  
MCU CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS  
NOP  
SLEEP  
WDR  
No Operation  
Sleep  
None  
None  
None  
None  
1
1
(see specific descr. for Sleep function)  
(see specific descr. for WDR/Timer)  
For On-chip Debug Only  
Watchdog Reset  
Break  
1
BREAK  
N/A  
159  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
22. Ordering Information  
Speed (MHz) (3)  
Power Supply (V)  
Ordering Code (4)  
Package (2)  
Operation Range  
ATtiny13V-10PU  
ATtiny13V-10SU  
ATtiny13V-10SUR  
ATtiny13V-10SSU  
ATtiny13V-10SSUR  
ATtiny13V-10MU  
ATtiny13V-10MUR  
ATtiny13V-10MMU  
ATtiny13V-10MMUR  
8P3  
8S2  
8S2  
S8S1  
S8S1  
20M1  
20M1  
10M1  
10M1  
Industrial  
10  
1.8 - 5.5  
(-40°C to +85°C)(1)  
ATtiny13-20PU  
ATtiny13-20SU  
8P3  
8S2  
ATtiny13-20SUR  
ATtiny13-20SSU  
ATtiny13-20SSUR  
ATtiny13-20MU  
ATtiny13-20MUR  
ATtiny13-20MMU  
ATtiny13-20MMUR  
8S2  
S8S1  
S8S1  
20M1  
20M1  
10M1  
10M1  
Industrial  
20  
2.7 - 5.5  
(-40°C to +85°C)(1)  
Notes: 1. These devices can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering informa-  
tion and minimum quantities.  
2. All packages are Pb-free, halide-free and fully green and they comply with the European directive for Restriction of Hazard-  
ous Substances (RoHS).  
3. For Speed vs. VCC, see “Speed Grades” on page 117.  
4. Code indicators:  
– U: matte tin  
– R: tape & reel  
Package Type  
8P3  
8-lead, 0.300" Wide, Plastic Dual Inline Package (PDIP)  
8S2  
8-lead, 0.209" Wide, Plastic Small Outline Package (EIAJ SOIC)  
S8S1  
20M1  
10M1  
8-lead, 0.150" Wide, Plastic Gull-Wing Small Outline (JEDEC SOIC)  
20-pad, 4 x 4 x 0.8 mm Body, Lead Pitch 0.50 mm, Micro Lead Frame Package (MLF)  
10-pad, 3 x 3 x 1 mm Body, Lead Pitch 0.50 mm, Micro Lead Frame Package (MLF)  
160  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
23. Packaging Information  
23.1 8P3  
E
1
E1  
N
Top View  
c
eA  
End View  
COMMON DIMENSIONS  
(Unit of Measure = inches)  
D
e
MIN  
MAX  
NOM  
NOTE  
SYMBOL  
D1  
A2 A  
A
0.210  
0.195  
0.022  
0.070  
0.045  
0.014  
0.400  
2
A2  
b
0.115  
0.014  
0.045  
0.030  
0.008  
0.355  
0.005  
0.300  
0.240  
0.130  
0.018  
0.060  
0.039  
0.010  
0.365  
5
6
6
b2  
b3  
c
D
3
3
4
3
b2  
L
D1  
E
b3  
4 PLCS  
0.310  
0.250  
0.325  
0.280  
b
E1  
e
0.100 BSC  
0.300 BSC  
0.130  
Side View  
eA  
L
4
2
0.115  
0.150  
Notes: 1. This drawing is for general information only; refer to JEDEC Drawing MS-001, Variation BA for additional information.  
2. Dimensions A and L are measured with the package seated in JEDEC seating plane Gauge GS-3.  
3. D, D1 and E1 dimensions do not include mold Flash or protrusions. Mold Flash or protrusions shall not exceed 0.010 inch.  
4. E and eA measured with the leads constrained to be perpendicular to datum.  
5. Pointed or rounded lead tips are preferred to ease insertion.  
6. b2 and b3 maximum dimensions do not include Dambar protrusions. Dambar protrusions shall not exceed 0.010 (0.25 mm).  
01/09/02  
TITLE  
DRAWING NO.  
REV.  
2325 Orchard Parkway  
San Jose, CA 95131  
8P3, 8-lead, 0.300" Wide Body, Plastic Dual  
In-line Package (PDIP)  
8P3  
B
R
161  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
23.2 8S2  
C
1
E
E1  
L
N
θ
TOP VVIIEEWW  
ENDD VVIIEEWW  
e
b
COMMON DIMENSIONS  
(Unit of Measure = mm)  
A
MIN  
1.70  
0.05  
0.35  
0.15  
5.13  
5.18  
7.70  
0.51  
0°  
MAX  
2.16  
0.25  
0.48  
0.35  
5.35  
5.40  
8.26  
0.85  
8°  
NOM  
NOTE  
SYMBOL  
A1  
A
A1  
b
4
4
C
D
E1  
E
D
2
L
SIDDE VIEW  
θ
e
1.27 BSC  
3
Notes: 1. This drawing is for general information only; refer to EIAJ Drawing EDR-7320 for additional information.  
2. Mismatch of the upper and lower dies and resin burrs aren't included.  
3. Determines the true geometric position.  
4. Values b,C apply to plated terminal. The standard thickness of the plating layer shall measure between 0.007 to .021 mm.  
4/15/08  
GPC  
DRAWING NO.  
TITLE  
REV.  
8S2, 8-lead, 0.208” Body, Plastic Small  
Outline Package (EIAJ)  
Package Drawing Contact:  
packagedrawings@atmel.com  
STN  
8S2  
F
162  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
23.3 S8S1  
1
3
2
H
N
Top View  
e
B
A
D
COMMON DIMENSIONS  
(Unit of Measure = mm)  
Side View  
MIN  
MAX  
1.75  
0.51  
0.25  
5.00  
4.00  
NOM  
NOTE  
SYMBOL  
A
B
C
D
E
e
A2  
L
C
1.27 BSC  
E
H
L
6.20  
1.27  
End View  
Note:  
This drawing is for general information only. Refer to JEDEC Drawing MS-012 for proper dimensions, tolerances, datums, etc.  
10/10/01  
TITLE  
DRAWING NO.  
REV.  
2325 Orchard Parkway  
San Jose, CA 95131  
8S1, 8-lead (0.150" Wide Body), Plastic Gull Wing  
8S1  
A
R
Small Outline (JEDEC SOIC)  
163  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
23.4 20M1  
D
1
2
Pin 1 ID  
SIDE VIEW  
E
3
TOP VIEW  
A2  
A1  
D2  
A
0.08  
C
1
2
3
Pin #1  
Notch  
(0.20 R)  
COMMON DIMENSIONS  
(Unit of Measure = mm)  
E2  
MIN  
0.70  
MAX  
0.80  
0.05  
b
NOM  
0.75  
NOTE  
SYMBOL  
A
A1  
A2  
b
0.01  
L
0.20 REF  
0.23  
0.18  
2.45  
2.45  
0.35  
0.30  
2.75  
2.75  
0.55  
e
D
4.00 BSC  
2.60  
D2  
E
BOTTOM VIEW  
4.00 BSC  
2.60  
E2  
e
0.50 BSC  
0.40  
Reference JEDEC Standard MO-220, Fig. 1 (SAW Singulation) WGGD-5.  
Note:  
L
10/27/04  
DRAWING NO. REV.  
TITLE  
2325 Orchard Parkway  
San Jose, CA 95131  
20M1, 20-pad, 4 x 4 x 0.8 mm Body, Lead Pitch 0.50 mm,  
20M1  
A
R
2.6 mm Exposed Pad, Micro Lead Frame Package (MLF)  
164  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
23.5 10M1  
D
y
Pin 1 ID  
E
SIDE VIEW  
TOP VIEW  
A1  
A
D1  
K
COMMON DIMENSIONS  
(Unit of Measure = mm)  
1
2
MIN  
MAX  
NOM  
NOTE  
SYMBOL  
A
0.80  
0.90  
1.00  
A1  
b
0.00  
0.18  
2.90  
1.40  
2.90  
2.20  
0.02  
0.25  
3.00  
0.05  
0.30  
3.10  
1.75  
3.10  
2.70  
b
E1  
D
D1  
E
e
3.00  
E1  
e
0.50  
L
0.30  
0.50  
0.08  
L
BOTTOM VIEW  
y
K
0.20  
Notes: 1. This package conforms to JEDEC reference MO-229C, Variation VEED-5.  
2. The terminal #1 ID is a Lasser-marked Feature.  
7/7/06  
TITLE  
DRAWING NO. REV.  
10M1  
2325 Orchard Parkway  
San Jose, CA 95131  
10M1, 10-pad, 3 x 3 x 1.0 mm Body, Lead Pitch 0.50 mm,  
A
R
1.64 x 2.60 mm Exposed Pad, Micro Lead Frame Package  
165  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
24. Errata  
The revision letter in this section refers to the revision of the ATtiny13 device.  
24.1 ATtiny13 Rev. D  
EEPROM can not be written below 1.9 Volt  
1. EEPROM can not be written below 1.9 Volt  
Writing the EEPROM at VCC below 1.9 volts might fail.  
Problem Fix/Workaround  
Do not write the EEPROM when VCC is below 1.9 volts.  
24.2 ATtiny13 Rev. C  
Revision C has not been sampled.  
24.3 ATtiny13 Rev. B  
Wrong values read after Erase Only operation  
High Voltage Serial Programming Flash, EEPROM, Fuse and Lock Bits may fail  
Device may lock for further programming  
debugWIRE communication not blocked by lock-bits  
Watchdog Timer Interrupt disabled  
EEPROM can not be written below 1.9 Volt  
24.3.1  
Wrong values read after Erase Only operation  
At supply voltages below 2.7 V, an EEPROM location that is erased by the Erase Only oper-  
ation may read as programmed (0x00).  
Problem Fix/Workaround  
If it is necessary to read an EEPROM location after Erase Only, use an Atomic Write opera-  
tion with 0xFF as data in order to erase a location. In any case, the Write Only operation can  
be used as intended. Thus no special considerations are needed as long as the erased loca-  
tion is not read before it is programmed.  
24.3.2  
24.3.3  
High Voltage Serial Programming Flash, EEPROM, Fuse and Lock Bits may fail  
Writing to any of these locations and bits may in some occasions fail.  
Problem Fix/Workaround  
After a writing has been initiated, always observe the RDY/BSY signal. If the writing should  
fail, rewrite until the RDY/BSY verifies a correct writing. This will be fixed in revision D.  
Device may lock for further programming  
Special combinations of fuse bits will lock the device for further programming effectively  
turning it into an OTP device. The following combinations of settings/fuse bits will cause this  
effect:  
– 128 kHz internal oscillator (CKSEL[1..0] = 11), shortest start-up time  
(SUT[1..0] = 00), Debugwire enabled (DWEN = 0) or Reset disabled RSTDISBL = 0.  
– 9.6 MHz internal oscillator (CKSEL[1..0] = 10), shortest start-up time  
(SUT[1..0] = 00), Debugwire enabled (DWEN = 0) or Reset disabled RSTDISBL = 0.  
166  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
– 4.8 MHz internal oscillator (CKSEL[1..0] = 01), shortest start-up time  
(SUT[1..0] = 00), Debugwire enabled (DWEN = 0) or Reset disabled RSTDISBL = 0.  
Problem fix/ Workaround  
Avoid the above fuse combinations. Selecting longer start-up time will eliminate the problem.  
24.3.4  
24.3.5  
debugWIRE communication not blocked by lock-bits  
When debugWIRE on-chip debug is enabled (DWEN = 0), the contents of program memory  
and EEPROM data memory can be read even if the lock-bits are set to block further reading  
of the device.  
Problem fix/ Workaround  
Do not ship products with on-chip debug of the tiny13 enabled.  
Watchdog Timer Interrupt disabled  
If the watchdog timer interrupt flag is not cleared before a new timeout occurs, the watchdog  
will be disabled, and the interrupt flag will automatically be cleared. This is only applicable in  
interrupt only mode. If the Watchdog is configured to reset the device in the watchdog time-  
out following an interrupt, the device works correctly.  
Problem fix / Workaround  
Make sure there is enough time to always service the first timeout event before a new  
watchdog timeout occurs. This is done by selecting a long enough time-out period.  
24.3.6  
EEPROM can not be written below 1.9 Volt  
Writing the EEPROM at VCC below 1.9 volts might fail.  
Problem Fix/Workaround  
Do not write the EEPROM when VCC is below 1.9 volts.  
24.4 ATtiny13 Rev. A  
Revision A has not been sampled.  
167  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
25. Datasheet Revision History  
Please note that the referring page numbers in this section refer to the complete document.  
25.1 Rev. 2535J-08/10  
Added tape and reel part numbers in “Ordering Information” on page 160. Removed text “Not  
recommended for new design” from cover page. Updated last page.  
25.2 Rev. 2535I-05/08  
1. Updated document template, layout and paragraph formats.  
2. Updated “Features” on page 1.  
3. Created Sections:  
“Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator Accuracy” on page 118  
“Analog Comparator Characteristics” on page 119  
4. Updated Sections:  
“System Clock and Clock Options” on page 23  
“Calibrated Internal 4.8/9.6 MHz Oscillator” on page 25  
“External Interrupts” on page 45  
“Analog Noise Canceling Techniques” on page 88  
“Limitations of debugWIRE” on page 96  
“Reading Fuse and Lock Bits from Firmware” on page 99  
“Fuse Bytes” on page 103  
“Calibration Bytes” on page 104  
“High-Voltage Serial Programming” on page 108  
“Ordering Information” on page 160  
5. Updated Figure:  
“Analog Input Circuitry” on page 87  
“High-voltage Serial Programming Timing” on page 122  
6. Moved Figures:  
“Serial Programming Timing” on page 121  
“Serial Programming Waveform” on page 121  
“High-voltage Serial Programming Timing” on page 122  
7. Updated Tables:  
“DC Characteristics, TA = -40°C to +85°C” on page 115  
“Serial Programming Characteristics, TA = -40°C to +85°C, VCC = 1.8 - 5.5V  
(Unless Otherwise Noted)” on page 121  
8. Moved Tables:  
“Serial Programming Instruction Set” on page 107  
“Serial Programming Characteristics, TA = -40°C to +85°C, VCC = 1.8 - 5.5V  
(Unless Otherwise Noted)” on page 121  
“High-voltage Serial Programming Characteristics TA = 25°C, VCC = 5.0V ± 10%  
(Unless otherwise noted)” on page 122  
9. Updated Register Description for Sections:  
168  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
“TCCR0A – Timer/Counter Control Register A” on page 69  
“DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0” on page 94  
10. Updated description in Step 1. on page 106.  
11. Changed device status to “Not Recommended for New Designs”.  
25.3 Rev. 2535H-10/07  
1.  
Updated “Features” on page 1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
9.  
Updated “Pin Configurations” on page 2.  
Added “Data Retention” on page 6.  
Updated “Assembly Code Example(1)” on page 39.  
Updated Table 21 in “Alternate Functions of Port B” on page 54.  
Updated Bit 5 description in “GIMSK – General Interrupt Mask Register” on page 46.  
Updated “ADC Voltage Reference” on page 87.  
Updated “Calibration Bytes” on page 104.  
Updated “Read Calibration Byte” on page 108.  
10. Updated Table 51 in “Serial Programming Characteristics” on page 121.  
11. Updated Algorithm in “High-Voltage Serial Programming Algorithm” on page 109.  
12. Updated “Read Calibration Byte” on page 112.  
13. Updated values in “External Clock Drive” on page 118.  
14. Updated “Ordering Information” on page 160.  
15. Updated “Packaging Information” on page 161.  
25.4 Rev. 2535G-01/07  
1.  
Removed Preliminary.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
9.  
Updated Table 7-1 on page 30, Table 8-1 on page 42,Table 18-8 on page 121.  
Removed Note from Table 7-1 on page 30.  
Updated “Bit 6 – ACBG: Analog Comparator Bandgap Select” on page 79.  
Updated “Prescaling and Conversion Timing” on page 83.  
Updated Figure 18-4 on page 121.  
Updated “DC Characteristics” on page 115.  
Updated “Ordering Information” on page 160.  
Updated “Packaging Information” on page 161.  
25.5 Rev. 2535F-04/06  
1.  
Revision not published.  
25.6 Rev. 2535E-10/04  
1.  
2.  
3.  
2.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
Bits EEMWE/EEWE changed to EEMPE/EEPE in document.  
Updated “Pinout ATtiny13/ATtiny13V” on page 2.  
Updated “Write Fuse Low Bits” in Table 17-13 on page 110, Table 18-3 on page 118.  
Added “Pin Change Interrupt Timing” on page 45.  
Updated “GIMSK – General Interrupt Mask Register” on page 46.  
Updated “PCMSK – Pin Change Mask Register” on page 47.  
Updated item 4 in “Serial Programming Algorithm” on page 106.  
Updated “High-Voltage Serial Programming Algorithm” on page 109.  
169  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
8.  
9.  
Updated “DC Characteristics” on page 115.  
Updated “Typical Characteristics” on page 122.  
10. Updated “Ordering Information” on page 160.  
11. Updated “Packaging Information” on page 161.  
12. Updated “Errata” on page 166.  
25.7 Rev. 2535D-04/04  
1.  
Maximum Speed Grades changed: 12MHz to 10MHz, 24MHz to 20MHz  
Updated “Serial Programming Instruction Set” on page 107.  
Updated “Speed Grades” on page 117  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Updated “Ordering Information” on page 160  
25.8 Rev. 2535C-02/04  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
9.  
C-code examples updated to use legal IAR syntax.  
Replaced occurrences of WDIF with WDTIF and WDIE with WDTIE.  
Updated “Stack Pointer” on page 11.  
Updated “Calibrated Internal 4.8/9.6 MHz Oscillator” on page 25.  
Updated “OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Register” on page 27.  
Updated typo in introduction on “Watchdog Timer” on page 37.  
Updated “ADC Conversion Time” on page 86.  
Updated “Serial Programming” on page 105.  
Updated “Electrical Characteristics” on page 115.  
10. Updated “Ordering Information” on page 160.  
11. Removed rev. C from “Errata” on page 166.  
25.9 Rev. 2535B-01/04  
1.  
Updated Figure 2-1 on page 4.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
Updated Table 7-1, Table 8-1, Table 14-2 and Table 18-3.  
Updated “Calibrated Internal 4.8/9.6 MHz Oscillator” on page 25.  
Updated the whole “Watchdog Timer” on page 37.  
Updated Figure 17-1 on page 105 and Figure 17-2 on page 108.  
Updated registers “MCUCR – MCU Control Register”, “TCCR0B – Timer/Counter Con-  
trol Register B” and “DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0”.  
Updated Absolute Maximum Ratings and DC Characteristics in “Electrical Characteris-  
tics” on page 115.  
7.  
8.  
9.  
Added “Speed Grades” on page 117  
Updated “” on page 120.  
10. Updated “Typical Characteristics” on page 123.  
11. Updated “Ordering Information” on page 160.  
12. Updated “Packaging Information” on page 161.  
13. Updated “Errata” on page 166.  
14. Changed instances of EEAR to EEARL.  
25.10 Rev. 2535A-06/03  
1.  
Initial Revision.  
170  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
Table of Contents  
Features..................................................................................................... 1  
Pin Configurations ................................................................................... 2  
1
2
3
1.1  
Pin Descriptions .................................................................................................3  
Overview ................................................................................................... 4  
2.1  
Block Diagram ...................................................................................................4  
General Information ................................................................................. 6  
3.1  
3.2  
3.3  
3.4  
Resources .........................................................................................................6  
Code Examples .................................................................................................6  
Data Retention ...................................................................................................6  
Disclaimer ..........................................................................................................6  
4
CPU Core .................................................................................................. 7  
4.1  
4.2  
4.3  
4.4  
4.5  
4.6  
4.7  
Architectural Overview .......................................................................................7  
ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit ...............................................................................8  
Status Register ..................................................................................................8  
General Purpose Register File ........................................................................10  
Stack Pointer ...................................................................................................11  
Instruction Execution Timing ...........................................................................12  
Reset and Interrupt Handling ...........................................................................12  
5
Memories ................................................................................................ 15  
5.1  
5.2  
5.3  
5.4  
5.5  
In-System Reprogrammable Flash Program Memory .....................................15  
SRAM Data Memory ........................................................................................15  
EEPROM Data Memory ..................................................................................16  
I/O Memory ......................................................................................................20  
Register Description ........................................................................................20  
6
7
System Clock and Clock Options ......................................................... 23  
6.1  
6.2  
6.3  
6.4  
Clock Systems and their Distribution ...............................................................23  
Clock Sources .................................................................................................24  
System Clock Prescaler ..................................................................................26  
Register Description ........................................................................................27  
Power Management and Sleep Modes ................................................. 30  
7.1  
7.2  
Sleep Modes ....................................................................................................30  
Minimizing Power Consumption ......................................................................31  
i
2535J–AVR–08/10  
7.3  
Register Description ........................................................................................32  
8
9
System Control and Reset .................................................................... 34  
8.1  
8.2  
8.3  
8.4  
Reset Sources .................................................................................................35  
Internal Voltage Reference ..............................................................................37  
Watchdog Timer ..............................................................................................37  
Register Description ........................................................................................41  
Interrupts ................................................................................................ 44  
9.1  
9.2  
9.3  
Interrupt Vectors ..............................................................................................44  
External Interrupts ...........................................................................................45  
Register Description ........................................................................................46  
10 I/O Ports .................................................................................................. 48  
10.1  
10.2  
10.3  
10.4  
Overview ..........................................................................................................48  
Ports as General Digital I/O .............................................................................49  
Alternate Port Functions ..................................................................................53  
Register Description ........................................................................................56  
11 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM ............................................................ 58  
11.1  
11.2  
11.3  
11.4  
11.5  
11.6  
11.7  
11.8  
11.9  
Features ..........................................................................................................58  
Overview ..........................................................................................................58  
Timer/Counter Clock Sources .........................................................................59  
Counter Unit ....................................................................................................59  
Output Compare Unit .......................................................................................60  
Compare Match Output Unit ............................................................................62  
Modes of Operation .........................................................................................63  
Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams .....................................................................67  
Register Description ........................................................................................69  
12 Timer/Counter Prescaler ....................................................................... 76  
12.1  
12.2  
12.3  
12.4  
Overview ..........................................................................................................76  
Prescaler Reset ...............................................................................................76  
External Clock Source .....................................................................................76  
Register Description. .......................................................................................77  
13 Analog Comparator ............................................................................... 78  
13.1  
13.2  
Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input .............................................................78  
Register Description ........................................................................................79  
14 Analog to Digital Converter .................................................................. 81  
ii  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
14.1  
14.2  
14.3  
14.4  
14.5  
14.6  
14.7  
14.8  
14.9  
Features ..........................................................................................................81  
Overview ..........................................................................................................81  
Operation .........................................................................................................82  
Starting a Conversion ......................................................................................82  
Prescaling and Conversion Timing ..................................................................83  
Changing Channel or Reference Selection .....................................................86  
ADC Noise Canceler .......................................................................................87  
Analog Input Circuitry ......................................................................................87  
Analog Noise Canceling Techniques ...............................................................88  
14.10 ADC Accuracy Definitions ...............................................................................88  
14.11 ADC Conversion Result ...................................................................................91  
14.12 Register Description ........................................................................................91  
15 debugWIRE On-chip Debug System .................................................... 95  
15.1  
15.2  
15.3  
15.4  
15.5  
15.6  
Features ..........................................................................................................95  
Overview ..........................................................................................................95  
Physical Interface ............................................................................................95  
Software Break Points .....................................................................................96  
Limitations of debugWIRE ...............................................................................96  
Register Description ........................................................................................96  
16 Self-Programming the Flash ................................................................. 97  
16.1  
16.2  
16.3  
16.4  
16.5  
16.6  
16.7  
16.8  
16.9  
Performing Page Erase by SPM ......................................................................97  
Filling the Temporary Buffer (Page Loading) ...................................................97  
Performing a Page Write .................................................................................98  
Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming .............................................98  
EEPROM Write Prevents Writing to SPMCSR ................................................99  
Reading Fuse and Lock Bits from Firmware ...................................................99  
Preventing Flash Corruption ..........................................................................100  
Programming Time for Flash when Using SPM ............................................100  
Register Description ......................................................................................101  
17 Memory Programming ......................................................................... 102  
17.1  
17.2  
17.3  
17.4  
17.5  
Program And Data Memory Lock Bits ...........................................................102  
Fuse Bytes .....................................................................................................103  
Calibration Bytes ...........................................................................................104  
Signature Bytes .............................................................................................104  
Page Size ......................................................................................................104  
iii  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
17.6  
17.7  
17.8  
Serial Programming .......................................................................................105  
High-Voltage Serial Programming .................................................................108  
Considerations for Efficient Programming .....................................................112  
18 Electrical Characteristics .................................................................... 115  
18.1  
18.2  
18.3  
18.4  
18.5  
18.6  
18.7  
18.8  
18.9  
Absolute Maximum Ratings* .........................................................................115  
DC Characteristics .........................................................................................115  
Speed Grades ...............................................................................................117  
Clock Characteristics .....................................................................................118  
System and Reset Characteristics ................................................................119  
Analog Comparator Characteristics ...............................................................119  
ADC Characteristics ......................................................................................120  
Serial Programming Characteristics ..............................................................121  
High-voltage Serial Programming Characteristics .........................................122  
19 Typical Characteristics ........................................................................ 123  
19.1  
19.2  
19.3  
19.4  
19.5  
19.6  
19.7  
19.8  
19.9  
Active Supply Current ....................................................................................123  
Idle Supply Current ........................................................................................126  
Power-Down Supply Current .........................................................................129  
Pin Pull-up .....................................................................................................130  
Pin Driver Strength ........................................................................................132  
Pin Thresholds and Hysteresis ......................................................................141  
BOD Thresholds and Analog Comparator Offset ..........................................146  
Internal Oscillator Speed ...............................................................................148  
Current Consumption of Peripheral Units ......................................................152  
19.10 Current Consumption in Reset and Reset Pulse width .................................154  
20 Register Summary ............................................................................... 156  
21 Instruction Set Summary .................................................................... 158  
22 Ordering Information ........................................................................... 160  
23 Packaging Information ........................................................................ 161  
23.1  
23.2  
23.3  
23.4  
23.5  
8P3 ................................................................................................................161  
8S2 ................................................................................................................162  
S8S1 ..............................................................................................................163  
20M1 ..............................................................................................................164  
10M1 ..............................................................................................................165  
24 Errata ..................................................................................................... 166  
iv  
ATtiny13  
2535J–AVR–08/10  
ATtiny13  
24.1  
24.2  
24.3  
24.4  
ATtiny13 Rev. D ............................................................................................166  
ATtiny13 Rev. C ............................................................................................166  
ATtiny13 Rev. B .............................................................................................166  
ATtiny13 Rev. A .............................................................................................167  
25 Datasheet Revision History ................................................................ 168  
25.1  
25.2  
25.3  
25.4  
25.5  
25.6  
25.7  
25.8  
25.9  
Rev. 2535J-08/10 ..........................................................................................168  
Rev. 2535I-05/08 ...........................................................................................168  
Rev. 2535H-10/07 .........................................................................................169  
Rev. 2535G-01/07 .........................................................................................169  
Rev. 2535F-04/06 ..........................................................................................169  
Rev. 2535E-10/04 ..........................................................................................169  
Rev. 2535D-04/04 .........................................................................................170  
Rev. 2535C-02/04 .........................................................................................170  
Rev. 2535B-01/04 ..........................................................................................170  
25.10 Rev. 2535A-06/03 ..........................................................................................170  
Table of Contents....................................................................................... i  
v
2535J–AVR–08/10  
Headquarters  
International  
Atmel Corporation  
2325 Orchard Parkway  
San Jose, CA 95131  
USA  
Tel: 1(408) 441-0311  
Fax: 1(408) 487-2600  
Atmel Asia  
Atmel Europe  
Le Krebs  
Atmel Japan  
9F, Tonetsu Shinkawa Bldg.  
1-24-8 Shinkawa  
Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-0033  
Japan  
Tel: (81) 3-3523-3551  
Fax: (81) 3-3523-7581  
Unit 1-5 & 16, 19/F  
BEA Tower, Millennium City 5  
418 Kwun Tong Road  
Kwun Tong, Kowloon  
Hong Kong  
8, Rue Jean-Pierre Timbaud  
BP 309  
78054 Saint-Quentin-en-  
Yvelines Cedex  
France  
Tel: (852) 2245-6100  
Fax: (852) 2722-1369  
Tel: (33) 1-30-60-70-00  
Fax: (33) 1-30-60-71-11  
Product Contact  
Web Site  
Technical Support  
Sales Contact  
www.atmel.com  
Enter Product Line E-mail  
www.atmel.com/contacts  
Literature Requests  
www.atmel.com/literature  
Disclaimer: The information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any  
intellectual property right is granted by this document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN ATMEL’S TERMS AND CONDI-  
TIONS OF SALE LOCATED ON ATMEL’S WEB SITE, ATMEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY  
WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDEN-  
TAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT  
OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Atmel makes no  
representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications  
and product descriptions at any time without notice. Atmel does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Unless specifically provided  
otherwise, Atmel products are not suitable for, and shall not be used in, automotive applications. Atmel’s products are not intended, authorized, or warranted for use  
as components in applications intended to support or sustain life.  
© 2010 Atmel Corporation. All rights reserved. Atmel®, logo and combinations thereof, AVR® and others are registered trademarks or trade-  
marks of Atmel Corporation or its subsidiaries. Other terms and product names may be trademarks of others.  
2535J–AVR–08/10  

相关型号:

ATTINY15

8-BIT AVR㈢ Microcontroller with 1K Byte Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY15(PDIP)

Microcontroller
ETC

ATTINY15(SOIC)

Microcontroller
ETC

ATTINY15-1PC

RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, CMOS, PDIP8, 0.300 INCH, PLASTIC, DIP-8
ATMEL

ATTINY15-1PI

RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, CMOS, PDIP8, 0.300 INCH, PLASTIC, DIP-8
ATMEL

ATTINY15-1SC

RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, CMOS, PDSO8, 0.150 INCH, PLASTIC, SOIC-8
ATMEL

ATTINY15-1SI

RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, CMOS, PDSO8, 0.150 INCH, PLASTIC, SOIC-8
ATMEL

ATTINY15L

8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 1K Byte Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY15L-1PC

8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 1K Byte Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY15L-1PI

8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 1K Byte Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY15L-1PJ

RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, 1.6MHz, CMOS, PDIP8, 0.300 INCH, PLASTIC, DIP-8
ATMEL

ATTINY15L-1PL

RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, 1.6MHz, CMOS, PDIP8, 0.300 INCH, PLASTIC, DIP-8
ATMEL